1. business and industrial
2. construction

UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA
HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UVA UH LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY - I.R. EQUIPMENT
REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064 / #15
Charlottesville, Virginia
PROJECT MANUAL
95% Construction Documents
PIMS NUMBER: P02989
WORK ORDER NUMBER: 1414669
HKS, INC.
2100 E. Cary St, Suite 100
Richmond, VA 23223
(804) 644-8400
(804) 644-8469 FAX
April 8, 2014
HKS 16567.001
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064 / #15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEGEND
FIRST COLUMN: LATEST ISSUE DATE OF SECTION
SECOND COLUMN: "X" IN BOX INDICATES SECTION IS INCLUDED IN CURRENT PRINTING
THIRD COLUMN: REVISION NUMBER (“O” INDICATES ORIGINAL, REVISIONS ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY)
FOURTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER
FIFTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE
NOTE FOR REVISED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
1.
DELETED INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A STRIKE THROUGH (IE, THIS IS DELETED).
2.
NEW INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A DOUBLE UNDERLINE (IE, THIS IS ADDED).
3.
ALL REVISED INFORMATION IS FURTHER IDENTIFIED BY A HEAVY VERTICAL LINE TO THE RIGHT OF ALL REVISIONS IN EACH INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION (REFER TO HEAVY BOLD LINE TO THE RIGHT FOR AN EXAMPLE).
ISSUES OF SPECIFICATIONS SECTIONS
Date
Description
2014-04-08
95% Construction Documents
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
00200
00300
00350
2014-01-15
0
00700
2014-01-15
0
00850
Pre-Bid Question Form
On-Demand Bid Form
Information Available from University
• ICRA Documents:
• Policy
• Guidelines
• Authorization
• Building Automation systems:
• Proposal
• Drawing
General Conditions
• HECO-7 General Conditions of the Construction
Contract for Capital Outlay Projects (Dated 5/8/13)
• CO-7 General Conditions of the Construction
Contract (Dated April, 2013)
Additional Documents
• Instructions to Bidders (HECO-7a) [included by reference]
• Contract between University and Contractor (HECO9) [included by reference]
• Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10) [included by
•
2014-01-15
0
00851
reference]
Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (HECO10.1) [included by reference]
• Contract Change Order (HECO-11) and Change
Order Justification (HECO 11a) [included by reference]
• General Contractor Estimate for Change Order
(HECO-GC-1) [included by reference]
• Subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECOSC-1) [included by reference]
• Sub-subcontractor Estimate for Change Order
(HECO-SS-1) [included by reference]
• Schedule of Values and Certificate of Payment
(HECO-12) [included by reference]
• Affidavit of Payment of Claims (CO-13)
• Final Report of Structural and Special Inspections
(HECO 13.1b)
• Certificate of Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2)
• Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by
Contractor (HECO-13.2a)
Drawing Index
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
0
0
0
01000
01010
01015
01027
01039
01230
General Provisions
Summary of Work
Miscellaneous Provisions and Conditions
Additional Instructions to Applications for Payment
Project Coordination and Meetings
Alternates
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
01300
01312
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
01320
01350
01400
01420
01500
01502
01600
01630
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
0
0
01640
01700
01710
01731
01770
Submittals
Project Communications
• Attachment - Request for Information (RFI) Form
Construction Progress Documentation
Alterations Project Procedures
Quality Control and Quality Assurance
References
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
Dust Control
Product Requirements
Product Substitution Procedures
• Attachment: Substitution Request Form
University Furnished Products
Execution Requirements
Project Clarifications
Cutting and Patching
Closeout Procedures
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
2014-01-15
0
02 4119
Selective Demolition
05 4300
Slotted Channel Framing
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 05 - METALS
2014-01-15
0
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
07 8413
07 8446
07 9200
Penetration Firestopping
Fire Resistive Joint Firestopping
Joint Sealants
08 1114
08 1416
08 7100
08 8000
Interior Hollow Metal Frames
Prefinished Flush Wood Doors
Door Hardware
Glazing
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
0
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
2014-01-15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
09 2900
09 5113
09 6229
09 6500
09 6513
09 6800
09 9100
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Cork Flooring
Resilient Flooring
Resilient Base and Accessories
Carpeting
Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NO SECTIONS
DIVISIONS 15-20 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 24 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings
DIVISIONS 29-30 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISIONS 36-39 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE
EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISIONS 46-47 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 49 - RESERVED
NO SECTIONS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
TOC - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00200
PRE-BID QUESTION FORM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRE-BID QUESTION FORM
A.
Pre-Bid Question Form immediately follow this Section.
PART 2 - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00200 - 1
PRE-BID QUESTION FORM
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00200 - 2
PRE-BID QUESTION FORM
Use separate form for each question submitted
Date: __________________________
Project:
UH Level 1: Radiology – I.R. Equipment Replacement Angio Room 1064 / #15
Project Code:
NA
PIMS # P02989
WO # 1414669
Question concerning Drawing Sheet # ____________:
____________________________________________
_____________________
____________________________________________
_________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Question concerning Specification Section # ____________, page _________, paragraph _________:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
All responses to questions will be made by Amendment / Addendum
Submitted by: (Print) ____________________________ ______ (Sign) ________________
Organization_
Email to:
_______
cporzio@hksinc.com
A/E (email)
______
Phone #
and
__andreaf@virginia.edu
UVA Project Manager (email)
or
Fax to: A/E Firm:
ATTN:
FAX:
HKS, Inc.
Catherine Porzio
(804) 644-8400
UVA PM:
FAX:
Andrea Fraley
(434) 924-1025
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
DATE: _______________
PROJECT: UVA UH Level 1 Radiology – I.R.
Equipment Replacement Angio Room 1064 / #15
Charlottesville, Virginia
A/E Project Number: 16567.001
PIMS #: P02989
Work Order No.: 1414669
BID TO:
Commonwealth of Virginia and
The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia
Facilities Planning and Construction - Office of Contract Administration
c/o Tony DiTolve, Construction Contract Administrator
1000 Ednam Center Suite 100 (22903 for hand delivery)
PO Box 400892 (U.S. Mail)
Charlottesville, VA 22904-4892
In compliance with and subject to your Invitation for Bids and the documents therein specified, all of which are
incorporated herein by reference, the undersigned bidder proposes to furnish all labor, equipment, and
materials and perform all work necessary for construction of this project, in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications dated April 8 2014, and the Addenda noted below, as prepared by HKS INC., 2100 EAST
CARY STREET, SUITE 100, RICHMOND, VIRGINIA 23223 for the consideration of the following amounts:
BASE BID
Lump sum price for renovation for the Work, including staging, shipping and work areas, as well as
administrative offices as indicated in the documents. Work includes necessary mechanical, electrical, and
plumbing upgrades:
BASE BID:
_______________________________________________________________________
Dollars:
$
.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00300 - 1
BID FORM
Contract Award will be based on the Base Bid amount shown on previous page (including any properly
submitted bid modifications).
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS:
The undersigned agrees that it will use as the subcontractor, for any and all Building Automation Systems
Johnson Controls Inc., Controls Group, a subcontractor selected by the Owner, for a subcontractor price
of xxx and 00/100 Dollars ($xxx) and that this quote shall be included in BASE BID above. The
undersigned agrees that it will be responsible for this subcontractor and its work as if it had been selected
by the undersigned. NOTE: This price does not include bond.
The undersigned understands that time is of the essence and agrees that the time for Substantial
Completion of the entire project shall be 90 consecutive calendar days from the date of commencement
of the Work as specified in the Notice to Proceed, and Final Completion shall be achieved within 30
consecutive calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion as determined by the A/E.
Acknowledgment is made of receipt of the following Addenda: ______________________________
________________________________________________________________________________.
If notice of acceptance of this bid is given to the undersigned within 30 days after the date of opening of
bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute and deliver a
contract in the prescribed form (Commonwealth of Virginia Contract Between University and Contractor,
Form HECO-9) within 10 days after the contract has been presented to him for signature. The required
payment and performance bonds, on the forms prescribed, shall be delivered to the University along with
the signed Contract.
Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986: The undersigned certifies that it does not and will not during
the performance of the Contract for this project violate the provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform
and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens.
DISQUALIFICATION OF CM/GCS: By signing this bid or proposal, the undersigned certifies that this
Bidder or any officer, director, partner or University is not currently barred from bidding on contracts by
any Agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or agency of another state, or any
agency of the federal government, nor is this Bidder a subsidiary or affiliate of any firm/corporation that is
currently barred from bidding on contracts by any of the same. We have attached an explanation of any
previous disbarment(s) and copies of notice(s) of reinstatement(s).
Either the undersigned or one of the following individuals, if any, is authorized to modify this bid prior to
the deadline for receipt of bids by writing the modification and signing his name on the face of the bid, on
the envelope in which it is enclosed, on a separate document, or on a document which is telefaxed to the
University or by sending the University a telegraphic message:
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00300 - 2
BID FORM
I certify that the firm name given below is the true and complete name of the bidder and that the bidder is
legally qualified and licensed by the Commonwealth of Virginia, Department of Commerce, State Board for
CM/GCs, to perform all Work included in the scope of the Contract. (The Bid Form must be signed by a
Corporate Officer or a person who has written delegated authority to commit this firm for the purposes
described herein by the University.)
Virginia License No. ______________
Bidder ______________________________
(Name of Firm)
CM/GC Class ________________
By___________________________________
(Signature)
Specialty _______________________
Valid until ______________________
____________________________________
(Typed Name)
FEIN/SSN: ________________________
If Partnership (List Partners' Names)
Title _______________________________
If Corporation, affix Corporate Seal &
list State of Incorporation
_________________________________
____________________________________
State: _____________________________
(Affix Corporate Seal)
Business Address:
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
Telephone # __________________________
FAX # ________________________________
E-mail address _________________________
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00300 - 3
BID FORM
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00300 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00350
INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM UNIVERSITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section references other information relevant to the construction of this Project that is
available from the University.
B.
At the request of the University, the information identified below represents services that have
been provided by others, not as an Architect’s Consultant, regarding conditions that affect this
Project that are beyond the responsibilities of the Architect and Architect’s Consultants.
Reference to such information herein is solely for the convenience of the University. Architect
makes no representation, express or implied, as to the accuracy or validity of the information.
C.
Bidders are expected to examine the site and the information available from the University to
determine for themselves the conditions to be encountered.
D.
If conditions other than those indicated in the information available from the University are
encountered before or during construction, notify the University before work continues.
1.2
INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT
A.
The University will assess the environmental impact of the work on the existing, adjacent
healthcare functions, and will prepare an Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) report that
includes specific requirements of the CM/GC.
B.
An outline of the CM/GCs Required Procedures follows this section. Additional project specific
information will be provided before the start of construction.
C.
The IRCA establishes strategic infection control provisions and requirements for the purpose of
controlling the dissemination of airborne micro-organism contaminants encountered or
generated during the construction process through the use of containment protocols and
environmental monitoring.
1.3
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
A.
Building Automation Systems: To be included in the Contractor's bid; refer to Division
00 Section "Bid Form". Information supporting said bid is contained in the proposal and
drawing that follows this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00350 - 1
INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM UNIVERSITY
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00350 - 2
INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM UNIVERSITY
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00350 - 3
Approved by Safety & Security Committee, 7/3/02
University of Virginia Health System
Infection Control Risk Assessment for Construction
Policy & Procedure
June 19, 2002
POLICY
An Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) must be performed for all construction,
renovation, repair and demolition projects in any facility directly related to or vertically or
horizontally adjacent to patient care activities. The person responsible for the specific project
will initiate the ICRA and a copy will be filed with Health System Physical Plant.
The types of projects that require an ICRA are as follows:
1. Any project managed or initiated by Facilities Planning & Construction
2. Any project managed or initiated by Health System Physical Plant Small Project Group
or Zone Maintenance
3. Any project managed or initiated by contracted vendors or others such as ROLM, Health
System Computing Services and Security
4. Any project managed or initiated by KCRC & Satellite Facilities Services
5. Any project managed or initiated by Health Services Foundation
6. Any other project for or affecting an affiliate of the Health System.
PROCEDURE
1. All employees and workers performing work involving construction, renovation, repair,
demolition and/or routine maintenance must complete ICRA training annually.
2. Review the Infection Control Risk Assessment Guideline
a. Identify the type of construction activity (Types A – D).
b. Identify the patient risk groups (Low, Medium or High Risk).
c. Match the construction activity and patient risk group to determine the class of
precautions that must be established (Class I – V).
3. Complete the Infection Control Risk Assessment Authorization for Construction
a. Class I, Class II and Class III projects may proceed without prior approval from the
UVA Infection Control group and do not require an ICRA Authorization form,
provided that those responsible for the project have completed the mandatory training
and are certified by UVA Infection Control within the previous year of the
commencement of the project.
b. Class IV and V projects require the completion of the Infection Control Risk
Assessment Authorization. Completion of the Authorization includes all applicable
reviews, approvals and signatures by the person responsible for the project. UVA
Infection Control must review and approve the authorization form prior to the
commencement of the project.
c. Revisions to this policy and procedure will be the joint responsibility of Infection
Control and the Life Safety Subcommittee.
Infection Control Risk Assessment Guidelines
Identify the Type of Construction Project Activity (Types A-D)
Non-invasive activities, including, but not limited to:
A
a.
b.
B
C
D
Removal of ceiling tiles where no dust is expected
Painting, but not sanding
c. Wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and activities which do not generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to
ceilings other than for visual inspection
Small scale, short duration activities which create minimal dust, including but not limited to:
a. Installation of telephone and computer cabling
b. Access to chase spaces
c. Cutting of walls or ceiling where dust migration can be controlled.
Work that generates a moderate to high level of dust or requires demolition or removal of any fixed building components
or assemblies, including but not limited to:
a. Sanding of walls for painting or wall covering
b. Removal of floor coverings, ceiling tiles, and casework
c. New wall construction
d. Minor duct work or electrical work above ceilings
e. Major cabling activities
f. Any type A, B or C activity that cannot be completed within a single work shift.
Major demolition and construction projects, including but not limited to:
a. Activities requiring heavy demolition or removal of a complete cabling system
b. New construction
Identify the Patient Risk Group that will be affected. If more than one risk group will be affected, select the higher group. For all
construction classes, patients must be removed from the room while work is performed.
Low
Medium
High
All outpatient clinics and offices, except outpatient
transplant clinics and outpatient cancer center clinics
All inpatient areas, except inpatient oncology, bone
marrow transplant, adult oncology, and pediatric
oncology. Outpatient transplant clinics and
outpatient cancer center clinics.
Inpatient oncology, inpatient bone marrow
transplant, inpatient adult oncology, inpatient
pediatric oncology, any other areas caring for
immunocompromised patients.
Match the Patient Risk Group (L, M, H) with the Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) to find the Class of Precautions (I – V)
Construction Project Type
Patient Risk Group
Low Risk
Medium Risk
High Risk
Type A
I
II (no cone, unless burn
patient with uncovered
wounds or transplant)
II (cone; pts. Must be
out of room; this
includes lung transplant
pts.)
Type B
II
III (no cone, unless burn
patient with uncovered
wounds or transplant)
IV
Type C
IV
V
Type D
V
V
V
V
Description of Required Infection Control Precautions by Class
Class
Class I
1.
Class II
2.
1.
Class III
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Class IV
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Class V
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
During Construction Project
Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from
construction operations.
Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced.
High Risk patients must remain out of room for one hour after
completion of work.
Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust.
Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced.
Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust.
Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced
Provide active means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing
into atmosphere.
Water-mist work surfaces to control dust while cutting.
Seal unused doors with duct tape.
Block off and seal HVAC registers and grills.
Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered
containers
Install plastic dust barriers to seal area from non-work area or
implement control cube method (cart with plastic covering and
sealed connection to work site with HEPA vacuum for
vacuuming prior to exit) before construction begins.
Isolate HVAC system in areas where work is being performed to
prevent contamination of duct system.
Maintain negative pressure within work site utilizing HEPA
equipped air filtration units.
Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered
containers.
All work associated with a major project that has an approved
ICRA authorization form will be assessed on an individual basis.
Construct gypsum board/metal stud dust partition, extend and
seal to ceiling.
Isolate HVAC system within work areas to prevent
contamination of duct system.
Seal doors opening to adjacent areas with duct tape.
Block off and seal HVAC registers, grills and any openings in
ductwork to remain.
Maintain negative pressure within work site utilizing HEPA
equipped air filtration units.
Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered
containers.
All work associated with a major project that has an approved
ICRA authorization form will be assessed on an individual basis.
Upon Completion of Project
1.
2.
Remove all visible debris with a wet towel and/or mop.
Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant.
1.
2.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers.
Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work
area.
Open previously sealed HVAC registers and grills.
Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers.
Do not remove barriers from work area until a Health System responsible
person inspects completed project.
Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dirt and debris
associated with construction.
Wet mop and vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work
area.
Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas where work was being
performed.
Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant.
Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers.
Do not remove barriers from work area until a Health System responsible
person inspects completed project.
Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dirt and debris
associated with construction.
Wet mop and vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work
area.
Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas where work was being
performed.
Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant.
Infection Control Risk Assessment Authorization
for Construction
Project:
WO#
Location of Construction:
Project Start
Date:
Project End Date:
Contractor Performing Work:
Responsible Person:
Telephone:
(Project Manager):
Match the Patient Risk Group (L, M, H) with the Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) to find
the Class of Precautions (I – V). CIRCLE ONE
Construction Project Type
Patient Risk
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Group
Low Risk
I
II
IV
V
Medium Risk
II
III
V
V
High Risk
II
IV
V
V
Exceptions: Plenum Ceilings exist. Complete negative Pressure cannot be obtained
Check if applicable
Comments:
Responsible Person:
Project Manager
Date
Epidemiologist Dept Approval:
(Revised 2/04)
Date
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
The General Conditions of this Contract immediately follow this Section and are listed as
follows:
1.
2.
B.
Document HECO-7: General Conditions of the Construction Contract for Capital Outlay
Projects, dated May 8, 2013.
Document CO-7: General Conditions of the Construction Contract, dated April, 2013.
The General Conditions shall apply to each and every Section of the Work as though written in
full therein and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
PART 2 - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00700 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00700 - 2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00700 - 3
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 1 of 8
HECO-7
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR
CAPITAL OUTLAY PROJECTS
1.
This addendum, HECO-7, modifies the Commonwealth of Virginia’s General Conditions
of the Construction Contract DGS-30-054 Form CO-7 (04/13), (attached) for use on all
Capital Outlay Projects.
2.
For all forms referenced in the attachment by ‘‘CO-”, replace ‘‘CO-” with ‘‘HECO-,’’
except the CO-9a and CO-13.
3.
In §1, add definition for the term “Rules,” as follows:
Rules: The Rules Governing Procurement of Goods, Services, Insurance, and Construction,
attached as Attachment 1 to that certain Policy Governing the Procurement of Goods, Services,
Insurance, and Construction, and the Disposition of Surplus Materials adopted by the Board of
Visitors of the University of Virginia, attached as Exhibit P to that certain Management
Agreement dated November 15, 2005, by and between the Commonwealth of Virginia and The
Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, as amended (Chapters 933 and 943 of the 2006
Acts of Assembly, as amended by Chapters 675 and 685 of the 2009 Acts of Assembly and
Chapters 116 and 161 of the 2011 Acts of Assembly).
4.
In §2(a), delete the words “Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and
Professional Services Manual” and insert in their place the words “University of Virginia
in its Higher Education Capital Outlay Manual.”
5.
In §3(e), delete the words “Building Official for State-owned Buildings” and insert in
their place the words “Building Official for the University.”
6.
Delete §4(a) and insert the following in its place:
(a) §10 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
1
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 2 of 8
1. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees
as follows:
a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee
or applicant for employment because of race, religion,
color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or other basis
prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in
employment, except where there is a bona fide
occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the
normal operation of the contractor. The contractor agrees
to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices setting forth the
provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
b. The contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will
state that such contractor is an equal opportunity employer.
c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in
accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be
deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the
requirements of this section.
2. The contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing
paragraphs a, b and c in every subcontract or purchase order of
over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each
subcontractor or vendor.
7.
Delete §5(a) and insert the following in its place:
(a) §11 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to
(i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor’s employees;
(ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that
the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation,
possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is
prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions
that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the
contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the
provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be
binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.
2
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 3 of 8
For the purposes of this section, ‘drug-free workplace’ means a site
for the performance of work done in connection with a specific
contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with these Rules,
the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the
unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession
or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the
performance of the contract.”
8.
Delete §8(a) and insert the following in its place:
For contracts with a value exceeding one million dollars
($1,000,000), the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner or its
designated representative, a University of Virginia Standard
Performance Bond (HECO-10) and Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond (Form HECO-10.1), each fully executed by the
Contractor and one or more surety companies legally licensed to
do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one
hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid. If more than one
Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to
the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall be
selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No
payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor
until the bonds have been approved by the Owner and the Office of
the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to facilitate review of
the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of
attorney from the surety company to its agent who executes the
bond shall be attached to the bond.
9. In §8(b), delete the references to “§2.2-4337.A.2 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in
their place references to “§29(A)(2) of the Rules.”
10. In §8(c), delete the reference to “§2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its
place a reference to “§30 of the Rules.”
11. In §8(d), delete the reference to “five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000)” and insert in
its place a reference to “one million dollars ($1,000,000).
12. In §11(b), delete the reference to “§2.2-4332 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its
place a reference to “§25 of the Rules.”
13. Delete §11(c) and insert the following in its place:
(c)
During the performance of the Work under this Contract,
the Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability
insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability,
3
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 4 of 8
Products and Completed Operations Coverage, Independent
Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's Protective
Liability, Contractual, and Personal Injury Liability, which
shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including
death, as well as against claims for property damage, which
may arise from operations under this Contract, whether
such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or
by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of
them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be
not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000
aggregate combined limit.
The Commonwealth of
Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the University of
Virginia, and their respective officers, employees and
agents, shall be named as additional insureds with respect
to the Work being procured. The Supplemental General
Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an
Umbrella insurance policy in a specified amount for the
Project.
14. Delete §11(e) and insert the following in its place:
(e)
The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may
be, shall provide occurrence-based liability insurance with
asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000
and shall name the following as additional insureds: The
Commonwealth of Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the
University of Virginia, their respective officers, employees
and agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos
Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos
work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor). In
those cases where only claims-made liability insurance is
available, the policy will remain in force throughout the
time of the asbestos work and for a minimum of two years
beyond the completion of the work without coverage
interruption, and if coverage is discontinued within that two
year period, the extended reporting period endorsement
must be added to the policy to cover the two year
requirement beyond work completion.
15. In §12 delete the entire existing section and section title and insert the following in its
place:
“12. INSURANCE FOR OWNER, UNIVERSITY, AND CM/GC
4
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 5 of 8
(a)
The University maintains property insurance on existing
buildings (including fire, vandalism, and extended
coverage).
(b)
For all projects the CM/GC, at its cost, shall obtain and
maintain in the names of the Owner, University, and
CM/GC, Builders’ Risk Insurance for the total Project
in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of
the construction Contract Price.
(c)
Builders’ Risk Insurance shall be adjusted as required if the
Contract Price changes.
(d)
Insurance agreements shall include a provision that the
University may take occupancy of portions of the Work as
it is completed, and prior to Substantial Completion of the
Work, and that the Builders’ Risk Insurance provided by
the CM/GC shall continue until the University accepts the
entire, completed Work, unless alternative insurance
coverage has been approved by the University’s Office of
Risk Management (i.e. University property coverage of
completed and occupied areas).
(e)
The amount of any deductible must be acceptable to the
University. The CM/GC will be liable for any deductible
whenever a claim arises.
(f)
The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable
to the Owner and University, in accordance with its
interests, as they may appear.
(g)
The Owner and University and their officers, employees,
and its agents, shall be named as additional insured in any
liability policy of insurance issued.
(h)
Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the
University no later than thirty (30) days following the
award of the construction phase Contract. In the event of
cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days
prior written notice must be sent to the University. A copy
of the policy or certificate of insurance shall be given to the
University upon demand.
5
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 6 of 8
(i)
The value of the Builders’ Risk Insurance shall include the
costs of excavations, backfills, foundations, underground
utilities, and site work.
(j)
The CM/GC and the individual Subcontractors and CM
Agency Trade Contractors are responsible for providing
any desired coverage for their buildings, equipment,
materials, tools, or supplies that are on-site.
(k)
Any insurance provided through the University on
buildings, construction, additions, or renovations will not
extend to the CM/GC nor the individual Subcontractors and
CM Agency Trade Contractors buildings, equipment,
materials, tools, or supplies unless these items are to
become property of the Owner upon completion of the
Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such
items at the time of the loss.
(l)
Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors are
covered under the CM/GC’s Builders’ Risk Insurance
policy and need not provide Builders’ Risk Insurance.
16. In §13, delete the last sentence.
17. In §36(d), delete the reference to “§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its
place a reference to “§26 of the Rules.”
18. Delete §36(i) and insert the following in its place:
(i)
Interest.
(1)
Interest shall accrue, at the rate determined pursuant to
subsection 2, on all amounts owed by the Owner to the
Contractor that remain unpaid after seven (7) days
following the payment date.
(2)
The rate of interest charged the Owner pursuant to
subsection 1 shall be the base rate on corporate loans
(prime rate) at large United States money center
commercial banks as reported daily in the publication
entitled The Wall Street Journal. Whenever a split prime
rate is published, the lower of the two rates shall be used.
However, in no event shall the rate of interest charged
exceed the rate of interest established pursuant to §58.11812 of the Code of Virginia.
6
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 7 of 8
(3)
Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be
charged when payment is delayed because of disagreement
between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the
quantity, quality or time of delivery of goods or services or
the accuracy of any invoice received for the goods or
services. The exception from the interest penalty provided
by this subsection shall apply only to that portion of a
delayed payment that is actually the subject of the
disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of the
disagreement.
(4)
This section shall not apply to retainage during the period
of time prior to the date the final payment is due.
(5)
Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be
paid to any debtor on any payment, or portion thereof,
withheld pursuant to the Comptroller’s Debt Setoff
Program, as authorized by the Virginia Debt Collection Act
(§2.2-4800 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), commencing
with the date the payment is withheld. If, as a result of an
error, a payment or portion thereof is withheld, and it is
determined that at the time of setoff no debt was owed to
the Commonwealth of Virginia, then interest shall accrue at
the rate determined pursuant to subsection 2 on amounts
withheld that remain unpaid after seven days following the
payment date.
(6)
These same provisions relating to payment of interest to the
Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual
of interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the
Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on
any claims by the Owner.
(7)
The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is
deemed to be the date of payment to the addressee.
19. In §37, delete the references to §2.2-4354, Code of Virginia” and insert in their place
references to “§45 of the Rules.”
20. In §38(a), delete the last sentence in the first paragraph and insert the following in its
place:
The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the
Owner’s designee is limited by §8 of the Rules and any applicable
statute.
7
HECO-7 (5/8/13)
Page 8 of 8
21. In §38(b), delete the last sentence in the second paragraph and insert the following in its
place:
Changes to the Contract time and/or Price shall be effective when
signed by both parties.
22. In §43(f), delete the reference to “§2.2-4335 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its
place a reference to “§27 of the Rules.”
23. In §47, delete the respective references to §§2.2-4363, 2.2-4364, 2.2-4365 and 2.2-4366
of the Code of Virginia and insert in their place references to §§53, 54, 55 and 56 of the
Rules, respectively.
8
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
1.
DEFINITIONS
3
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
6
3.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
7
4.
NONDISCRIMINATION
9
5.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS
9
6.
TIME FOR COMPLETION
10
7.
CONDITIONS AT SITE
11
8.
CONTRACT SECURITY
11
9.
SUBCONTRACTS
12
10.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
13
11.
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
13
12.
"ALL-RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
14
13.
TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS
15
14.
PATENTS
15
15.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS
15
16.
INSPECTION
17
17.
SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR
19
18.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES
19
19.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK
20
20.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
23
21.
ACCESS TO WORK
24
22.
SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
24
23.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
24
24.
SUBMITTALS
26
1
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
25.
FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES
28
26.
EQUALS
28
27.
AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS
29
28.
CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS
29
29.
STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP
29
30.
WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
30
31.
USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
30
32.
TEMPORARY ROADS
31
33.
SIGNS
31
34.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
31
35.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
32
36.
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
32
37.
PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR
36
38.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
37
39.
EXTRAS
43
40.
CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
43
41.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
43
42.
TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
44
43.
DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME
45
44.
INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL INSPECTION
47
45.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
48
46.
ASSIGNMENTS
50
47.
CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES
50
48.
ASBESTOS
51
49.
TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
52
50.
PROJECT MEETINGS
52
51.
SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM)
54
BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN
PLEASE NOTE: The CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, has been created specifically for the
use of agencies of the Commonwealth of Virginia, which may not alter any provisions without the express written
approval of the Virginia Department of General Services, Division of Engineering and Buildings. The General
Conditions have significant legal implications and shall not be altered or modified. Nothing in the CO-7, General
Conditions of the Construction Contract, shall be amended or deleted or its intent changed, except by an approved
and properly issued Supplemental General Condition. The Commonwealth makes no representation as to their
suitability for any other purpose. (Note: Political subdivisions intending to modify the General Conditions for their
use should consult with their legal counsel.)
2
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
1.
CO-7
DEFINITIONS
Whenever used in these General Conditions of the Construction Contract ("General Conditions") or in the
Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the
singular and plural and the male and female gender thereof:
Agency: The Agency, institution or department which is a party to the Contract. For purposes of the
Contract, the term Owner shall include such Agency, whether or not the Agency owns the site or the
building.
Architect, Engineer, Architect/Engineer or A/E: The term used to designate the Architect and/or the
Engineer that contracts with the Owner to provide the Architectural and Engineering services for the
Project. The A/E is a separate contractor and not an agent of the Owner. The term includes any associates
or consultants employed by the A/E to assist in providing the A/E services.
Beneficial Occupancy: The condition after Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion of the
Project at which time the Project, or portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and systems operational such
that the Owner could, after obtaining necessary approvals and certificates, occupy and utilize the space for
its intended use. Guarantees and warranties applicable to that portion of the Work begin on the date the
Owner accepts the Project, or a portion thereof, for such Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified
in the Supplemental General Conditions or by separate agreement.
Change Order: A document (Form CO-11) issued on or after the effective date of the Contract Between
Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) which is agreed to by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and
which authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract
Price and/or the Contract Completion Date. The term Change Order shall also include written orders to
proceed issued pursuant to Section 38 (a) (3). A Change Order, once signed by all parties, is incorporated
into and becomes a part of the Contract.
Code of Virginia: 1950 Code of Virginia as amended. Sections of the Code referred to herein are noted
by § xx-xx.
Construction: The term used to include new construction, reconstruction, renovation, restoration, major
repair, demolition and all similar work upon buildings and ancillary facilities, including any draining,
dredging, excavation, grading or similar work upon real property.
Contract: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work must be substantially complete. The Contract
Completion Date is customarily established in the Notice to Proceed, based on the Time for Completion. In
some instances, however, the Contract contains a mandatory Contract Completion Date, which shall be
stated in the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal, as applicable.
Contract Documents: The Contract between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) signed by the Owner
and the Contractor and any documents expressly incorporated therein. Such incorporated documents
customarily include the bid submitted by the Contractor, these General Conditions, any Supplemental
General Conditions, any Special Conditions, the plans and the specifications, and all modifications,
including addenda and subsequent Change Orders.
Contract Price: The total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing the Work, subject to
modification by Change Order.
Contractor: The person with whom the Owner has entered into a contractual agreement to do the Work on
this project.
3
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Date of Commencement: the date as indicated in the written Notice to Proceed, the receipt of the earliest
Building Permit, or a date mutually agreed to between the Owner and Contractor in writing, whichever is
the latest.
Day(s): Calendar day(s) unless otherwise noted.
Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty, deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of
inspections, standards, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, or Work that has been
damaged prior to the A/E's recommendation of Final Payment (unless responsibility for the protection
thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy).
Drawing: A page or sheet of the Plans which presents a graphic representation, usually drawn to scale,
showing the technical information, design, location, and dimensions of various elements of the Work. The
graphic representations include, but are not limited to, plan views, elevations, transverse and longitudinal
sections, large and small scale sections and details, isometrics, diagrams, schedules, tables and/or pictures.
Emergency: Any unforeseen situation, combination of circumstances, or a resulting state that poses
imminent danger to health, life or property.
Final Completion Date: The date of the Owner's acceptance of the Work from the Contractor upon
confirmation from the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor that the Work is totally complete in
accordance with Section 44(b).
Field Order: A written order issued by the A/E which clarifies or explains the plans or specifications, or
any portion or detail thereof, without changing the design, the Contract Price, the Time for Completion or
the Contract Completion Date.
Final Payment: The final payment that the Contractor receives pursuant to the applicable provisions of
Section 36, except in the event no final payment is made due to termination of the Contract under either
Sections 41 or 42. In the event of a termination for cause under Section 41, the Final Payment shall be
when the termination became effective. In the event of a termination for convenience under Section 42, the
Final Payment shall be either the payment of compensation for termination that the Contractor receives
according to the provisions of Subsection 42, or the Owner’s determination that no compensation for
termination is due the Contractor under Subsection 42, as the case may be.
Float: The excess time included in a construction schedule to accommodate such items as inclement
weather and associated delays, equipment failures, and other such unscheduled events. It is the contingency
time associated with a path or chain of activities and represents the amount of time by which the early
finish date of an activity may be delayed without impacting the critical path and delaying the overall
completion of the Project. Any difference in time between the Contractor's approved early completion date
and the Contract Completion Date shall be considered a part of the Project float.
Float, Free: The time (in days) by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting upon
the start day of any activity following in the chain.
Float, Total: The difference (in days) between the maximum time available within which to perform an
activity and the duration of an activity. It represents the time by which an activity may be delayed or
lengthened without impacting the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date.
Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and disapprovals, required
or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Contract shall be
sufficiently given by any one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered by
4
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is due; (2) delivered by hand to
the person's authorized agent, representative or officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a
postage prepaid envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a United States
Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such delivery. All notices to the Owner should
be directed to the Project Manager.
If the Owner and the Contractor agree in writing that Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or e-mail are
acceptable for the Project, such Notice shall be transmitted to the Fax number or e-mail address listed in the
agreement and shall have a designated space for the Fax or e-mail Notice recipient to acknowledge his
receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax or e-mail Notice with authorized signature
acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed or e-mailed back to the sender. The Faxed or e-mailed Notice shall
be effective on the date it is acknowledged by authorized signature. All Faxed or e-mailed Notices shall
also be sent by hard copy, which shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be
effective upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or e-mailed Notice or the date of delivery,
whichever occurs first.
Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to A/E) fixing the
date on which the Contract time will commence for the Contractor to begin the prosecution of the Work in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Notice to Proceed will customarily
identify a Contract Completion Date.
Owner: The public body with whom the Contractor has entered into a contractual agreement and for whom
the Work or services is to be provided. The term "Owner", as used herein, shall also mean the Agency.
Person: This term includes any individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust,
joint venture, or other legal entity.
Plans: The term used to describe the group or set of project-specific drawings which are included in the
Contract Documents.
Project: The term used instead of the specific or proper assigned title of the entire undertaking which
includes, but is not limited to, the "Work" described by the Contract Documents.
Project Inspector: One or more persons employed by the Owner to inspect the Work for the Owner and/or
to document and maintain records of activities at the Site to the extent required by the Owner. The Owner
shall notify the Contractor in writing of the appointment of such Project Inspector(s). The scope of the
Project Inspector's authority with respect to the Contractor is limited to that indicated in Section 16 (e) and
(f) and as supplemented by the Owner in writing to the Project Inspector and to the Contractor.
Project Manager: The Project Manager as used herein shall be the Owner's designated representative on
the Project. The Project Manager shall be the person through whom the Owner generally conveys written
decisions and notices. All notices due the Owner and all information required to be conveyed to the Owner
shall be conveyed to the Project Manager. The scope of the Project Manager's authority is limited to that
authorized by the Owner, who shall provide written information to the Contractor at the Preconstruction
meeting defining those limits. Upon receipt of such information, the Contractor shall be on notice that it
cannot rely on any decisions of the Project Manager outside the scope of his authority. Nothing herein shall
be construed to prevent the Owner from issuing any notice directly to the Contractor. The Owner may
change the Project Manager from time to time and may, in the event that the Project Manager is absent,
disabled or otherwise temporarily unable to fulfill his duties, appoint an interim Project Manager.
Provide: Shall mean furnish and install ready for its intended use.
Schedule of Values: The schedule prepared by the Contractor and acceptable to the Owner which
indicates the value of that portion of the Contract Price to be paid for each trade or major component of the
Work.
5
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Site: Shall mean the location at which the Work is performed or is to be performed.
Specifications: That part of the Contract Documents containing the written administrative requirements
and the technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship
which describe the proposed Work in sufficient detail and provide sufficient information for the Building
Official to determine code compliance and for the Contractor to perform the Work. (The General
Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, various bidding information and instructions, and blank
copies of various forms to be used during the execution of the Work are usually bound with the
Specifications.)
Subcontractor: A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of the Work. Subcontractor includes any person who provides on-site labor but does not
include any person who only furnishes or supplies materials for the Project.
Submittals: All shop, fabrication, setting and installation drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
samples, and other data required by the Contract Documents which are specifically prepared by or for the
Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules,
performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by
the Contractor to illustrate material or equipment conformance of some portion of the Work with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Substantial Completion: The condition when the Owner agrees that the Work, or a specific portion
thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that it can be utilized by
the Owner for the purposes for which it was intended. The Owner at its sole discretion may, after obtaining
the necessary approvals and certificates, take Beneficial Occupancy at this time or choose to wait to occupy
until after Final Completion is achieved.
Supplemental General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements
the General Conditions.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, material-man or vendor who provides material for the
Project but does not provide on-site labor.
Time for Completion: The number of consecutive calendar days following the Date of Commencement
which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the Contract.
Underground Facilities: All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which are or have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal,
traffic or other control systems or water.
Work: The services performed under this Contract including, but not limited to, furnishing labor, and
furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction. The Work also includes the
entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be provided
under the Contract Documents or which may reasonably be expected to be provided as part of a complete,
code compliant and functioning system for those systems depicted in the plans and specifications..
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
(a)
The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (CO-9), the Workers' Compensation Certificate of
Coverage (CO-9a), the Standard Performance Bond (CO-10), the Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond (CO-10.1), the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (CO-12), the
Affidavit of Payments of Claims (CO-13), the Contractor's Certificate of Substantial Completion
(CO-13.2a), and the Contractor's Certificate of Completion (CO-13.2) issued by the
6
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and Professional Services Manual are forms
incorporated in these General Conditions by reference and are made a part hereof to the same
extent as though fully set forth herein. They must be used by the Contractor for their respective
purposes.
3.
(b)
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Time for
Completion of the Work, are of the essence of the Contract.
(c)
The Contract Between Owner and Contractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor in
as many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon, each of which shall be considered
an original.
(d)
Anything called for by one of the Contract Documents and not called for by the others shall be of
like effect as if required or called for by all, except that a provision clearly designed to negate or
alter a provision contained in one or more of the other Contract Documents shall have the intended
effect. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall take
precedence in the following order: the Contract between Owner and Contractor; the Supplemental
General Conditions; the General Conditions; the Special Conditions; the specifications with
attachments; and the plans.
(e)
If any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, such
holding shall not invalidate any other provision.
(f)
All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents related to this Project
whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor or others should be identified at the
beginning of the document with the eleven digit (XXX-XXXXX-XXX) Project Code Number.
Additional identification such as a job number, purchase order number or such may also be shown
at the generator's option.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
(a)
The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any
public authority bearing on the performance of the Work and shall give all notices required
thereby. The Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors and tradesmen who perform Work on
the project are properly licensed by the Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation
as required by Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Articles 1 and 3 and by applicable regulations.
(b)
This Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Articles 3
and 5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, relating to labor unions and the "right to work." The
Contractor and its Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who
perform any Work related to the Project shall comply with all of the said provisions.
(c)
IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By signing this Contract, the
Contractor certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of this Contract violate the
provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits
employment of illegal aliens.
(d)
The provisions of all rules and regulations governing safety as adopted by the
Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia and as issued by the Department
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia shall apply to all Work under
Inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry shall be granted access to
inspection without first obtaining a search or administrative warrant.
(e)
Building Permit: Because this Project is on Commonwealth of Virginia property, codes or zoning
ordinances of local political subdivisions do not apply to Work on the property. The Virginia
7
Safety Codes
of Labor and
this Contract.
the Work for
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Uniform Statewide Building Code applies to the Work and is administered by the Building
Official for State-owned Buildings. The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the
Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments imposed
by the appropriate political subdivision shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See
Section 25 for utility connection fees and services.
(f)
The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor
to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements in Subsections
(a), (b), and (c) of Section 37 of these General Conditions with respect to each lower-tier
Subcontractor and Supplier.
(g)
The Contractor, if not licensed as an asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with §54.1-514,
Code of Virginia, shall have all asbestos-related Work performed by subcontractors who are duly
licensed as asbestos contractors for the Work required.
(h)
Lead Based Paint Activities: If the Contract Documents indicate that lead based paint is present on
existing materials, components, or surfaces, the Contractor shall conform to the following:
(1)
The requirements set forth in 59 Federal Register 45,872 (September 2, 1994) Proposed
Rule) - Lead; Requirements for Lead based Paint Activities (Proposed Rules) in selecting
and performing the means, methods and procedures for performing the Work. This
includes, but is not limited to, training of personnel, lead abatement, encapsulation of
lead containing materials, removal and handling of lead containing materials, and
methods of disposal. When the Final Rule, to be codified at 40 CFR 745, supersedes the
Proposed Rule, the Contractor shall be responsible for conforming to the Final Rule, as of
the effective date set forth therein.
(2)
The requirements for employee protection contained in 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart D,
and the requirements for record-keeping contained 29 CFR Part 1910.
(3)
The Virginia Department of Labor and Industry's (DLI) Emergency Regulation published
in the May 27, 1996 Virginia Register, requiring, among other things, that a permit be
issued to the lead abatement contractor, or any subsequent regulation issued by DLI.
(i)
If the Contractor violates laws or regulations that govern the Project, the Contractor shall take
prompt action to correct or abate such violation and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless
against any fines, and/or penalties that result from such violation. To the extent that such violation
is the result of negligence or other actionable conduct of the Contractor, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any third party claims, suits, awards, actions,
causes of action or judgments, including but not limited to attorney's fees and costs incurred
thereunder, that arise or result from such violation.
(j)
If the Work includes any land disturbing activities, the Contractor shall have on-site an individual
certified by the Department of Conservation and Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber in
accordance with §10.1-563, Code of Virginia.
(k)
The Contractor is neither required nor prohibited from entering into or adhering to agreements
with one or more labor organizations, or otherwise discriminating against subcontractors for
becoming or refusing to become, or remaining signatories to or otherwise adhering to, agreements
with one or more labor organizations. This section does not prohibit contractors or subcontractors
from voluntarily entering into agreements with one or more labor organizations. Both the agency
and contractor are entitled to injunctive relief to prevent any violation of this section.
This section does not apply to any public-private agreement for any construction in which the
private body, as a condition of its investment or partnership with the state agency, requires that the
8
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
private body have the right to control its labor relations policy and perform all work associated
with such investment or partnership in compliance with all collective bargaining agreements to
which the private party is a signatory and is thus legally bound with its own employees and the
employees of its contractors and subcontractors in any manner permitted by the National Labor
Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. § 151 et seq., or the Railway Labor Act, 45 U.S.C. § 151 et seq.
This section does not prohibit an employer or any other person covered by the National Labor
Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act from entering into agreements or engaging in any other
activity protected by law.
This section shall not be interpreted to interfere with the labor relations of persons covered by the
National Labor Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act.
4.
NONDISCRIMINATION
(a)
§2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“1.
2.
(b)
5.
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:
a.
The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or
other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except
where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the
normal operation of the contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous
places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth
the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
b.
The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity
employer.
c.
Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule
or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements
of this section.
The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every
subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding
upon each subcontractor or vendor.”
Where applicable, the Virginians with Disabilities Act and the federal Americans with Disabilities
Act shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS
(a)
§2.2-4312 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free
workplace for the contractor's employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees
and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is
prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against
employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free
workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor. For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance
of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with
this chapter, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during
the performance of the contract.”
9
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(b)
6.
CO-7
The Contractor shall also establish, maintain and enforce policies which prohibit the following
acts by all Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier personnel at the Site:
(1)
The manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol, marijuana or
other drugs, except possession and medically prescribed use of prescription drugs; and
(2)
The impairment of judgment or physical abilities due to the use of alcohol, marijuana or
other drugs, including impairment from prescription drugs.
TIME FOR COMPLETION
(a)
The Time for Completion shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids, Request for
Proposals, or other prebid/proposal documents. In some instances, the Time for Completion may
be stated on the Invitation for Bids, Request for Proposals, or other prebid/pre-proposal document
in the form of a Contract Completion Date. The Work must be substantially completed by the
Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor
shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days after the date of Substantial Completion.
(b)
The Time for Completion shall be stated in the Contract between Owner and Contractor and shall
become a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of the
facilities to be constructed and for all other purposes. If the Contractor fails to substantially
complete the Work within the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as set forth in
the Contract, he shall be subject to payment of actual damages incurred by the Owner or liquidated
damages, if provided for in the Contract.
(c)
The Contractor, in submitting his bid or proposal, acknowledges that he has taken into
consideration normal weather conditions. Normal weather does not mean statistically average
weather, but rather means a range of weather patterns which might be anticipated based on
weather data for the past ten (10) years, (i.e., conditions which are not extremely unusual). Normal
weather conditions shall be determined from the public historical records available, including the
U.S. Department of Commerce, Local Climatological Data Sheets, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration / Environmental Data and Information Service, National Climatic
Center and National Weather Service. The data sheets to be used shall be those for the locality or
localities closest to the site of the work. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor
because of adverse weather conditions; however, an extension of time for abnormal weather will
be considered by the Owner under the following conditions, all of which must be strictly complied
with by the contractor:
(1)
The request for additional time shall be further substantiated by weather data collected
during the period of delay at the Site. Said data must demonstrate that an actual departure
from normal weather occurred at the Site during the dates in question.
(2)
The extension requested must be supported by a delay in completion of the entire Project
shown on the critical path of the accepted CPM Schedule or the approved bar graph
schedule required for the Project. Extensions will be granted only for delays in
completion of the Project, not for that portion of any delay which consumes only "float"
time.
(3)
A request for extension of time based on abnormal weather must be made in writing
within fourteen (14) calendar days of the completion of the calendar month during which
abnormal weather is claimed at the Site.
(4)
All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical data and the
recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be furnished to the Owner before
any consideration will be given to the request. That supporting data shall be submitted by
the end of the calendar month following the month for which the request is made.
10
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
7.
8.
CO-7
(d)
The failure by the Contractor to comply with any and all of the conditions in (c) above shall
constitute a waiver of claims for the extension of time for abnormal weather.
(e)
The Contractor represents and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of
the bid documents, the Contract Documents, local conditions, availability of materials, equipment,
and labor, and any other factors which may affect the performance of the Work. The Contractor
agrees and warrants that he will achieve Substantial Completion of the Work to allow the Owner
to have Beneficial Occupancy not later than the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Final Completion of the Work (the
entire completion of all Work, including "punch list" items), not later than thirty (30) days after
achieving Substantial Completion.
CONDITIONS AT SITE
(a)
The Contractor shall have visited the Site prior to bidding or submitting its proposal and is totally
responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and
general character of the Site, and the character and extent of existing conditions, improvements
and work within or adjacent to the Site. Claims, which result from the Contractor's failure to do so,
will be deemed waived.
(b)
If, in the performance of the Contract, hidden physical conditions of a building being modified are
exposed revealing unusual or materially different conditions from those ordinarily encountered or
inherent in work of this nature, or if subsurface or latent conditions at the Site are found which are
materially different from those frequently present in the locality or from those indicated in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor must report such conditions to the Owner and to the
Architect/Engineer before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon his own
observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly propose such changes in the
Contract Documents as he finds necessary to conform to the different conditions. Any change in
the cost of the Work or additional time needed for completion must be requested pursuant to
Sections 38, 39 and/or 43 of these General Conditions.
(c)
If the Contractor, during the course of the Work, observes the existence of any material which he
knows, should know, or has reason to believe is hazardous to human health, the Contractor shall
promptly notify the Owner. The Owner will provide the Contractor with instructions regarding the
disposition of the material. The Contractor shall not perform any Work involving the material or
any Work causing the material to be less accessible prior to receipt of special instructions from the
Owner.
CONTRACT SECURITY
(a)
For contracts with a value exceeding five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor
shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard
Performance Bond, DGS-30-084 (Form CO-10) and a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Labor
and Material Payment Bond, DGS-30-088 (Form CO-10.1) each fully executed by the Contractor
and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an
amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid or proposal. If more than one
Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire
amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the
Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds
have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to
facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from
the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond, or, if not so
attached, prior to the execution of the bonds by the surety, recorded in the Office of the Clerk of
Court for the City of Richmond, Virginia, at the John Marshall Court Building, 400 North Ninth
11
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Street, except when the Owner is one of the following, in which case the power of attorney must
be recorded with the Clerk of Court in the place shown:
9.
OWNER
University of Virginia
PLACE OF RECORDATION
City of Charlottesville
Old Dominion University
City of Norfolk
Norfolk State University
City of Norfolk
Christopher Newport University
City of Newport News
Virginia Polytechnic Institute
and State University
County of Montgomery
(b)
For the purposes of all Standard Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into, the term
"subcontractors" as used in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any
contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor (referred
to in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia as the "prime contractor"), whether such contractor
had a direct contract with the Contractor (prime contractor) or whether there were one or more
other intervening Subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Contractor (prime
contractor).
(c)
See § 2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, for alternative forms of security for payment and/or
performance bonds.
(d)
For contracts with a value of less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor
will not be required to provide a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond as described above unless the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal states that
such bonds will be required.
SUBCONTRACTS
(a)
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the Contract, notify the Owner and
Architect/Engineer in writing of the names of all Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of
the Work and of such others as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Where the specifications
establish qualifications or criteria for Subcontractors, manufacturers, or individuals performing
Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that those proposed meet
the criteria or qualifications. The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Owner
may, within a reasonable time, object to as unsuitable. Neither the Owner nor the
Architect/Engineer shall direct the Contractor to contract with any particular Subcontractor unless
provided in the specifications or Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal.
(b)
The Owner may select a particular Subcontractor for a certain part of the Work and designate on
the Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal that the Subcontractor shall be used for the part of
the Work indicated and that the Subcontractor has agreed to perform the Work for the subcontract
amount stipulated on the bid or Proposal form. The Contractor shall include the stipulated amount
plus his Contractor markups in the bid or Proposal. In such case, the Contractor shall be
responsible for that Subcontractor and its work and the Subcontractor shall be responsible to the
Contractor for its work just as if the Contractor had selected the Subcontractor. If the Contractor
has a reasonable objection to the Subcontractor being assigned, then the Contractor shall note the
exception in his bid or proposal and the reason for the exception and maintain appropriate
provisions for coordinating the work of the Subcontractor. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may
accept the Contractor’s bid or proposal with the exception noted and contract separately with the
Subcontractor under the provisions Section 10 of the contract or assign a different Subcontractor.
12
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
10.
11.
CO-7
(c)
The Owner shall, on request, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, the amounts of payments
made to the Contractor, the Schedule of Values and Requests for Payment submitted by the
Contractor and any other documentation submitted by the Contractor which would tend to show
what amounts are due and payable by the Contractor to the Subcontractor.
(d)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his agents and
employees and all succeeding tiers of Subcontractors and Suppliers performing or furnishing any
of the Work. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between
Owner or Architect/Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Architect/Engineer to pay
for or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization, except as may otherwise be required by law.
(e)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his invitees at the Site and for those of his
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and their employees, including any acts or omissions of such invitees.
(f)
The Contractor agrees that he alone is responsible for all dealings with his Subcontractors and
Suppliers, and their subcontractors, employees and invitees, including, but not limited to, the
Subcontractors' or Suppliers' claims, demands, actions, disputes and similar matters unless
specifically provided otherwise by the Contract or by statute.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
(a)
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project, the Work under
which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall
afford other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their
materials and the execution of their work. The Contractor shall cooperate with them and shall take
all reasonable action to coordinate his Work with theirs. If the Owner has listed other separate
contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal which it expects to proceed
simultaneously with the Work of the Contractor, and has included the estimated timing of such
other Contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal, the Contractor shall integrate
the schedule of those separate contracts into his scheduling. The Contractor shall make every
reasonable effort to assist the Owner in maintaining the schedule for all separate contracts. If the
work performed by the separate contractor is defective or performed so as to prevent or threaten to
prevent the Contractor from carrying out his Work according to the Contract, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer upon discovering such conditions.
(b)
If a dispute arises between the Contractor and any separate contractor(s) as to their responsibility
for cleaning up as required by Sections 31 (c) and 31 (d) of these General Conditions, the Owner
may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the respective contractors in proportion to their
responsibility. If a Contractor disputes the Owner's apportionment of clean-up costs, it shall be
that contractor's burden to demonstrate and prove the correct apportionment.
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
(a)
The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he has obtained all the
insurance required hereunder from an insurer authorized to do business in Virginia and such
insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to
commence Work on his subcontract until the same types of insurance in an appropriate amount
have been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance
by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder.
(b)
The Contractor shall take out, and shall maintain in force at all times during the performance of
the Work, Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of his employees
13
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
engaged in the Work in an amount not less than the minimum required by §§ 2.2-4332 and 65.2100 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. In case any of the Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require
each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability
Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in the Work. Prior to award of the
Contract, the Contractor shall submit, on the form provided by the Owner, a Certificate of
Coverage verifying Workers' Compensation. The Contractor shall likewise obtain a Certificate of
Coverage for Workers' Compensation coverage from each subcontractor prior to awarding the
subcontract and shall provide a copy to the Owner.
12.
(c)
During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain
commercial general liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, Products and
Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's
Protective Liability, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of
personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise
from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any
Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of
general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000
aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, employees and agents,
shall be named as an additional insured with respect to the Work being procured. The
Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance
policy in a specified amount for the Project.
(d)
During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain automobile
liability insurance which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as
well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by either of them. The amounts of automobile insurance shall be not less than
$1,000,000 combined limit for bodily injury and property damage per occurrence.
(e)
The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based
liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name
the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, its employees
and its agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor
(where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor).
"ALL RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
(a)
The Contractor, at his cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner and the
Contractor "all-risk" builder's risk insurance (or fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious
mischief insurance, if approved by the Owner and the Director, Division of Engineering and
Buildings) upon the entire structure or structures on which the Work of this Contract is to be done
and upon all material in or adjacent thereto which is intended for use thereon, to one hundred
percent (100%) of the insurable value thereof. Such insurance may include a deductible provision
if the Owner so provides in the Supplemental General Conditions, in which case the Contractor
will be liable for such deductions, whenever a claim arises. The loss, if any, is to be made
adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear.
The Owner, its officers, employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any
policy of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the Owner no later
than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the event of cancellation of this
insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of
the policy of insurance shall be given to the Owner upon demand.
(b)
The value of the builder's risk insurance shall exclude the costs of excavations, backfills,
foundations, underground utilities and Sitework.
14
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
13.
CO-7
(c)
The Owner maintains insurance coverage on its buildings. On re-roofing, renovation, and interior
modifications of existing building projects where the Owner continues to occupy the building, or a
portion thereof, while the Work is being performed, the Contractor shall provide “all risk” builders
risk insurance, as described above, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the
Contract Price for the Work. In those instances, the Contract between the Owner and Contractor
for the project shall expressly exclude the project from the requirements of Subsection 12(a). The
Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for Contractor's or Subcontractors'
buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies that are on-site.
(d)
Any insurance provided through the Department of Treasury, Division of Risk Management, on
buildings, construction, additions or renovations will not extend to Contractor's nor
Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies unless these items are to become
property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility
for such items at the time of the loss.
TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS
The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable federal, state, and local
taxes, fees, and assessments except the taxes, fees and assessments on the real property comprising the Site
of the project. If the State Building Official elects to have the local building official inspect the Work as
provided by §36-98.1 of the Code of Virginia, the Owner shall pay the resulting fees to the local building
official.
14.
PATENTS
The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or
technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold the
Owner, its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any loss or liability for or on account of the
infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or appliance
manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner, unless such
invention, process, technique, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications or plans as
acceptable for use in carrying out the Work. If, before using any invention, process, technique, article or
appliance specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work,
the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of patent making it necessary
to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he shall promptly advise the
Owner and the Architect/Engineer. The Owner may direct that some other invention, process, technique,
article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe that the invention, process,
technique, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent, and fail to inform the Owner and
the Architect/Engineer, he shall be responsible for any loss or liability due to the infringement.
15.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS
(a)
The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to endeavor to secure the faithful performance by
Owner and Contractor of the Work under the Contract. He shall review the Contractor's Submittals
for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and return copies to the
Contractor with appropriate notations. He shall interpret the requirements of the plans and
specifications and issue Field Orders to the Contractor as may be required. He shall recommend to
the Owner suspension of the Work (in whole or in part) whenever such suspension may be
necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall have authority to reject, in
writing, Work, including material, installation or workmanship, which does not conform to the
requirements of the plans and specifications. He shall determine the progress and quality of the
Work, subject to the right of the Owner to make an overriding decision to the contrary. Upon
request by the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer shall confirm, in writing within fourteen (14)
days, any oral order or determination made by him.
15
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(b)
The Architect/Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work which
alter the design concept or which call for an extension of time or a change in the Contract Price.
(c)
Although the Owner is bound by the terms of the Contract with the Contractor, including the plans
and specifications, the Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to countermand any decision
of the Architect/Engineer and to follow or reject the advice of the Architect/Engineer, including
but not limited to acceptance of the Work, as it deems best. In those instances where the
Architect/Engineer has been given authority to act, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly do so,
but in the case of disagreement between the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, the decision of the
Owner shall be final. The Contractor shall not be bound by any determination, interpretation or
decision of the Architect/Engineer, if it is later determined that the same is not in accord with the
Contract Documents. The party taking issue with the determination, interpretation or decision of
the Architect/Engineer shall give the other party written notice of such fact within fourteen (14)
days after the determination, interpretation or decision is communicated by the
Architect/Engineer. In the actual performance of the Work, however, the Contractor shall, in the
first instance, proceed in accordance with instructions given by the Architect/Engineer unless the
Owner and the Contractor mutually agree that the Contractor shall proceed otherwise.
(d)
All orders from the Owner to the Contractor shall either be transmitted through the
Architect/Engineer or communicated directly to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer by the
Owner.
(e)
Should the Owner choose to employ another or different Architect/Engineer, the status of the
Architect/Engineer so employed shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer.
(f)
The Architect/Engineer will provide to the Owner and the Contractor after each visit to the Site, a
written report indicating the date, time of day, weather conditions and the names of the persons
representing the Architect/Engineer who participated in the visit. The report will advise the Owner
of any problems that were noted and shall compare the Architect/Engineer's observations of the
actual progress of the Work with that reported by the Contractor. On the basis of his on-Site
observations as Architect/Engineer, he will make every reasonable effort to guard the Owner
against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. He shall have the authority to
inspect the Work, to note and report Defective Work and deviations from the Contract Documents
to the Owner, to reject same, and to recommend to the Owner the suspension of the Work when
necessary to prevent Defective Work from proceeding or being covered.
The Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures (other than those expressly specified in Contract Documents), or for
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he shall not be responsible for
the Contractor's failure to carry out the Contractor's own responsibilities.
(g)
(h)
The Architect/Engineer generally conveys written decisions and notices to the Contractor through
the Project Manager and shall generally receive information and Notices from the Contractor
through the Project Manager unless otherwise agreed. The Owner may delegate from the
Architect/Engineer to the Project Manager certain inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection,
and administrative duties and authority, but any such delegation shall be in writing and a copy
thereof provided to the Contractor.
(i)
The provisions of this section are included as information only to describe the relationship
between the Owner, A/E, and Contractor. No failure of the A/E to act in accordance with this
section shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the Contract or create any rights in
favor of the Contractor.
16
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
16.
CO-7
INSPECTION
(a)
All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and testing by the
Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the Project Inspector, authorized inspectors and authorized
independent testing entities at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction. The
Architect/Engineer and the Owner shall have authority to reject defective material and
workmanship and require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected
and rejected material shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material without charge therefor,
and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected material from the Site. If the
Contractor fails to proceed at once with replacement of rejected material and/or the correction of
defective workmanship, the Owner may, by contract or otherwise, replace such material and/or
correct such workmanship and charge the cost to the Contractor, or may terminate the right of the
Contractor to proceed as provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions, the Contractor and
surety being liable for any damage to the same extent as provided in Section 41 for termination
thereunder.
(b)
Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site, which the Contract
requires to be performed by independent testing entities, shall be contracted and paid for by the
Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete, foundation materials, soil
compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and steel framing connections. The Contractor
shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials
necessary and convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever such
examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or workmanship, the Contractor shall
reimburse the Owner for the cost of reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by
independent testing entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of
materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes, standards, etc., require
to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry standards such as Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees are charged for such tests and certifications, they
shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and
certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay, together with any
inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his own purposes, but are not required by
the Contract.
(c)
Where Work is related to or dependent on the Defective Work, the Contractor shall stop such
related or dependent Work until the Defective Work or deficiency is corrected or an alternative
solution is presented that is satisfactory to the Owner. Where Work is rejected because of
defective material or workmanship, the Contractor shall stop like Work in other areas or locations
on the Project until the matter is resolved and the Owner has approved corrective measures.
(d)
Should it be considered necessary or advisable by Owner or the Architect/Engineer at any time
before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of any part of the Work already
completed, by removing or tearing out portions of the Work, the Contractor shall on request
promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and material to expose the Work to be tested to the
extent required. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, due to the fault of the
Contractor or his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall bear all the expenses of uncovering the
Work, of examination and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is
found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of the Contractor's labor and
material necessarily involved in uncovering the Work, the cost of examination and testing, and
Contractor's cost of material and labor necessary for replacement including a markup of fifteen
(15%) percent for overhead and profit shall be paid to the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if
completion of the Work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses in
removing and replacing the Work if the Contractor had covered the Work prior to any inspection
or test contrary to the instructions of the A/E, Owner or Project Inspector.
17
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(e)
The Project Inspector has the authority to recommend to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner
that the Work be suspended when in his judgment the Contract Documents are not being followed.
Any such suspension shall be continued only until the matter in question is resolved to the
satisfaction of the Owner. The cost of any such Work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor
unless it is later determined that no fault existed in the Contractor's Work.
(f)
The Project Inspector has the right and the authority to:
(g)
(h)
(1)
Inspect all construction materials, equipment, and supplies for quality and for compliance
with the Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings and Submittals.
(2)
Inspect workmanship for compliance with the standards described in the Contract
Documents.
(3)
Observe and report on all tests and inspections performed by the Contractor.
(4)
Recommend rejection of Work which does not conform to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
(5)
Keep a record of construction activities, tests, inspections, and reports.
(6)
Attend all joint Site construction meetings and inspections held by the Owner and/or the
A/E with the Contractor.
(7)
Check materials and equipment, together with documentation related thereto, delivered
for conformance with approved Submittals and the Contract.
(8)
Check installations for proper workmanship and conformance with shop drawing and
installation instructions.
(9)
Assist in the review and verification of the CO-12, Schedule of Values & Certificate for
Payment, submitted by the Contractor each month.
(10)
Do all things for or on behalf of the Owner as the Owner may subsequently direct in
writing.
The Project Inspector has no authority to:
(1)
Authorize deviations from the Contract Documents;
(2)
Enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor's superintendent;
(3)
Issue directions relative to any aspect of construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or in regard to safety precautions and programs in connection
with the Work;
(4)
Authorize or suggest that the Owner occupy the Project, in whole or in part; or
(5)
Issue a certificate for payment.
The duties of the Project Inspector are for the benefit of the Owner only and not for the
Contractor. The Contractor may not rely upon any act, statement, or failure to act on the part of the
Project Inspector, nor shall the failure of the Project Inspector to properly perform his duties in
18
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
any way excuse Defective Work or otherwise improper performance of the Contract by the
Contractor.
17.
18.
SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR
(a)
The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, satisfactory to the
Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times during the progress of the Work. The
superintendent or foreman shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and
specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the Owner's inspectors
and the Contractor's workers. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under
the Contract except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and
worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, of any
proposed change in superintendent, including the reason therefor, prior to making such change.
(b)
The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among the workers on
the Project, and shall not employ on the Work, or contract with, any unfit person, anyone not
skilled in the Work assigned to him, or anyone who will not work in harmony with those
employed by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the Owner or the Owner's separate contractors
and their subcontractors.
(c)
The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Site any employee or
Subcontractor's employee the Owner deems to be incompetent, careless, not working in harmony
with others on the Site, or otherwise objectionable, but the Owner shall have no obligation to do
so.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES
(a)
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for supervising and directing the Work competently and
efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be
necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except where otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others
in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract. The Contractor is solely
responsible to the Owner that the finished Work complies with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for health and safety precautions and programs for
workers and others in connection with the Work. No inspection by, knowledge on the part of, or
acquiescence by the Architect or Engineer, the Project Inspector, the Owner, the Owner's
employees and agents, or any other entity whatever shall relieve the Contractor from its sole
responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract or its sole responsibility for
health and safety programs and precautions.
(b)
If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means,
method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to Architect/Engineer,
subject to the Owner's right to disapprove. The Contractor must submit its written request for the
substitution to the Architect/Engineer with sufficient information to allow the Architect/Engineer
to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the
Contract.
19
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(c)
19.
CO-7
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identification of any drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
Work to be performed by any specific trade.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK
(a)
General: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the Work, for
coordinating the Work, for monitoring the progress of the Work, and for taking appropriate action
to keep the Work on schedule. The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date established by the Contract
and receive payment in accordance with Section 36 for the Work completed each period.
However, the date established by the Contract Documents as the deadline for achieving
Substantial Completion must be used in all schedules as the date on which Substantial Completion
will be achieved. The time (in days) between the Contractor's planned early completion and the
contracted Time for Completion is part of the Project "Total Float" time and will be used as such.
Extensions of time pursuant to Sections 38, 39, and 43, damages for delay, and all other matters
between the Owner and the Contractor will be determined using the contractually required
Substantial Completion date, not an early Substantial Completion date planned by the Contractor.
Within two (2) weeks after the Contractor signs the Contract Between Owner and Contractor,
unless otherwise extended by the Owner at the time of the signing, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, a preliminary bar graph schedule
for accomplishing the Work based upon the Time for Completion stated in the Contract. The
preliminary schedule shall be in sufficient detail to show the sequencing of the various trades for
each floor level, wing or work area. The Owner will notify the Contractor of its acceptance of or
objections to the preliminary schedule within fifteen (15) days of receipt by the Owner. A fully
complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work must be submitted in like manner no later
than sixty (60) days after the Contract is signed by the Owner.
The Owner's failure to reject or its acceptance of any schedule, graph, chart, recovery schedule,
updated schedule, plan of action, etc. shall not constitute a representation or warranty by the
Owner, including but not limited to a representation or warranty that the schedule is feasible or
practical nor shall any such acceptance or failure to reject relieve the Contractor from sole
responsibility for completing the Work within the time allowed.
No progress payments will be payable to the Contractor until after it has submitted a preliminary
schedule which is acceptable to the Owner. Neither the second progress payment nor any
subsequent payment shall be payable to the Contractor until it has submitted a fully complete
Project schedule accepted by the Owner. Nor shall subsequent progress payments be payable to
the Contractor unless and until he submits the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by
Section 19(d) herein or unless and until he provides any recovery schedule pursuant to Section
19(e) herein.
Failure to provide a satisfactory preliminary or fully complete Project schedule within the time
limits stated above shall be a breach of contract for which the Owner may terminate the Contract
in the manner provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions.
The fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work shall be of the type set forth in
subparagraph (1) or (2) below, as appropriate:
(1)
For Contracts with a price of $1,500,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy the
above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and completion
dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below.
20
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(2)
(b)
For Contracts with a price over $1,500,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule shall
be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the Work. The CPM schedule shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c)
below.
Bar Graph Schedule: Where a bar graph schedule is required, it shall be time-scaled in weekly
increments, shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of
the Work by trade and by area, level, or zone, and shall schedule dates for all salient features,
including but not limited to the placing of orders for materials, submission of shop drawings and
other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, the manufacture
and delivery of material, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and
all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever
associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If
the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner
shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity
will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
(c)
CPM Schedule: Where a CPM schedule is required, it shall be in the time-scaled precedence
format using the Contractor's logic and time estimates. The CPM schedule shall be drawn or
plotted with activities grouped or zoned by Work area or subcontract as opposed to a random (or
scattered) format.
The CPM schedule shall be time-scaled on a weekly basis and shall be drawn or plotted at a level
of detail and logic which will schedule all salient features of the Work, including not only the
actual construction Work for each trade, but also the submission of shop drawings and other
Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, placing of orders for
materials, the manufacture and delivery of materials, the testing and installation of materials and
equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. Failure to include any
element of Work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor
from completing all Work required within the Time for Completion, Contract Completion Date
and any interim deadlines established by the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever
associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If
the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner
shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity
will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
When completed, the CPM schedule shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner
for review. The CPM schedule will identify and describe each activity, state the duration of each
activity, the calendar dates for the early and late start and the early and late finish of each activity,
and clearly highlight all activities on the critical path. "Total float" and "free float" shall be
indicated for all activities. Float time, whether "free float" or "total float" as defined in Section 1,
shall not be considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor, but
must be allocated in the best interest of completing the Work within the Time for Completion or
21
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
the Contract Completion Date. Extensions to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion
Date, when granted by Change Order, will be granted only when equitable time adjustment
exceeds the Total Float in the activity or path of activities affected by the change provided that the
Owner has reasonably provided information necessary to allow for the orderly progression of the
Work. On contracts with a price over $5,000,000, the CPM schedule shall also show what part of
the Contract Price (expressed in U.S. dollars) is attributable to each activity on the schedule and
shall be in agreement with the schedule of values, the sum of which for all activities shall equal
the total Contract Price. The CPM schedule shall have no line-item activities longer than thirty
(30) days in duration, and activities shall be included to provide sufficient detail for effectively
managing the sequence of the Work. When acceptable to the Owner and Architect/Engineer as to
compliance with the requirements of this Section, the schedule shall become the CPM schedule for
the Project. Acceptance of the schedule by the Owner does not indicate agreement with, nor
responsibility for the proposed or actual duration of any activity or logic shown on the accepted
schedule.
(d)
Monthly Project Reports: The Contractor shall review progress not less than each month, but as
often as necessary to properly manage the Project and stay on schedule. The Contractor shall
collect and preserve information on Change Orders, including extensions of time. The Contractor
shall evaluate this information and update the latest accepted schedule as often as necessary to
finish within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. The
Contractor shall submit to the A/E along with his monthly request for payment a copy of the bar
graph schedule annotated to show the current progress. For projects requiring a CPM schedule, the
Contractor shall submit a monthly report of the status of all activities. The bar graph schedule or
monthly status report submitted with each periodic request for payment shall show the Work
completed to date in comparison with the Work scheduled for completion, including but not
limited to the dates for the beginning and completion of the placing of orders; the manufacture,
testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. The form shall be approved by the
A/E and the Owner; however, a bar graph or a CPM schedule marked, colored or annotated to
reflect the above will usually satisfy this requirement. If any elements of the Work are behind
schedule, regardless of whether they may prevent the Work from being completed on time, the
Contractor must indicate in writing in the report what measures he is taking and plans to take to
bring each such element back on schedule and to ensure that the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date is not exceeded.
(e)
Progress Delay: Should any of the following conditions exist, the Owner may require the
Contractor to prepare, at no extra cost to the Owner, a plan of action and a recovery schedule for
completing the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date:
(1)
The Contractor's monthly project report indicates delays that are, in the opinion of the
A/E or the Owner, of sufficient magnitude that the Contractor's ability to complete the
Work by the scheduled Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is brought
into question;
(2)
The CPM schedule sorted by early finish shows the Contractor to be thirty (30) or more
days behind the critical path schedule at any time during construction up to thirty (30)
days prior to scheduled Substantial Completion date;
(3)
The Contractor desires to make changes in the logic (sequencing of Work) or the planned
duration of future activities of the CPM schedule which, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer or the Owner, are of a major nature.
The plan of action and recovery schedule, when required, shall explain and display how the
Contractor intends to regain compliance with the current accepted, fully completed, Project CPM
schedule, as updated by approved change orders.
22
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
The plan of action, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two (2)
business days of the Contractor receiving the Owner's written demand. The recovery schedule,
when required, shall be submitted to the Owner within five (5) calendar days of the Contractor's
receiving the Owner's written demand.
(f)
Early Completion of Project: The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. However, such planned early
completion shall be for the Contractor's convenience only and shall not create any additional rights
of the Contractor or obligations of the Owner under this Contract, nor shall it change the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall not be required to pay damages
to the Owner because of its failure to achieve Substantial Completion by its planned earlier date.
Likewise, the Owner shall not pay the Contractor any additional compensation for achieving
Substantial Completion early nor will the Owner owe the Contractor any compensation should the
Owner, its officers, employees, or agents cause the Contractor not to achieve Substantial
Completion earlier than the date required by the Contract Documents.
If the Contractor seeks to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to
reflect an earlier completion date, he may request or propose such a change. The Owner may, but
is not required to, accept such proposal. However, a change in the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. If the Contractor's
proposal to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is accepted, a
Change Order will be issued stating that all references in the Contract, including these General
Conditions, to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall thereafter refer to
the date as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Contractor's liability for actual
damages, delay damages and/or liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date, as
modified.
20.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
(a)
Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor shall
prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a schedule of the
estimated values listed by trades or by specification sections of the Work, totaling the Contract
Price. Where the total project has multiple parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate
schedules of values to facilitate reviews and justifications for payments.
All requests for payment shall be made in the ASTM Uniformat II structure on the Schedule of
Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) pages 1 and 2. Succeeding pages may be on the
Form CO-12 continuation sheets or a computerized spreadsheet which is in the same format and
which contains the same information. Where a computerized spreadsheet is used, one copy of the
entire Schedule of Values shall be provided to the Owner in an agreed electronic format (e.g.
EXCEL) with the initial request for payment.
(b)
If the Contractor requests, or intends to request, payment for materials stored in an approved and
secure manner, the Schedule of Values must indicate the amount for labor and the amount for
materials, and in a supplement thereto must include an itemized list of materials for that trade or
Work section. The material breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
quantities required for the Project, the quantities delivered, the Work completed, and the quantities
stored on or off Site.
(c)
The "Value of Work Completed" portion of the Form CO-12 shall be completed, the Contractor's
certification completed and signed, and the appropriate substantiating material attached to each
Certificate for Payment (CO-12). Such substantiating material includes, but is not limited to,
invoices for materials, delivery tickets, time sheets, payroll records, daily job logs/records, and
23
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
similar materials which, in the opinion of the Owner and the A/E, are necessary or sufficient to
justify payment of the amount requested.
21.
(d)
The labor progress for any task or activity shall be calculated based upon the percentage of Work
complete up to fifty percent (50%) of the completion of the task or activity. Thereafter, the
evaluation of labor progress will be based upon the effort required to complete that task or
activity. The material progress shall be calculated as the invoiced dollar cost of materials used in
relationship to the amount estimated as necessary to complete a particular element of Work. When
calculating material progress, credit shall be given for installed material as well as that stored on
the Site and any material stored off Site which has been certified by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions.
(e)
Should Work included in previous Form CO-12 submittals, and for which payment has been
made, subsequently be identified, by tests, inspection, or other means, as not acceptable or not
conforming to Contract requirements, the "Value of Work Completed" portion of the first Form
CO-12 submitted after such identification shall be modified to reduce the "completed" value of
that Work by deleting the value of that which has been identified as not acceptable or
nonconforming.
ACCESS TO WORK
The Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Manager, the Owner's inspectors and other testing
personnel, inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry, and others authorized by the
Owner, shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities
for access and inspection.
22.
23.
SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
(a)
The Owner shall furnish the Contractor all necessary documents showing property lines and the
location of existing buildings and improvements. The Contractor shall provide competent
surveying and engineering services to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract and shall
be responsible for the accuracy of these surveying and engineering services.
(b)
The Owner shall provide such general reference points and benchmarks on the Site as will enable
the Contractor to proceed with the Work will be established in the plans and specifications. If the
Contractor finds that any previously established reference points have been lost or destroyed, he
shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer.
(c)
The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established benchmarks and monuments and shall
make no changes in locations without written notice to the Architect/Engineer and the written
approval from the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting
because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior written approval of the
Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
The general character and scope of the Work are illustrated by the plans and the specifications. If
the Contractor deems additional detail or information to be needed, he shall request the same in
writing from the Architect/Engineer. His request shall precisely state the detail or information
needed and shall explain why it is needed. The Contractor shall also indicate a date when the
requested information is required. The Architect/Engineer shall provide by Field Order such
further detail and information as is necessary by the date required so long as the date indicated is
reasonable. Any additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be consistent
with the Contract Documents, shall be true developments thereof, and shall be so prepared that
they can be reasonably interpreted as a part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in
24
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions at no additional cost or time to the
Owner.
(b)
If the Contractor finds a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans or
specifications, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing as soon as possible, but before
proceeding with the affected Work. The Architect/Engineer shall issue a clarification by Field
Order to the Contractor stating the correct requirements. If the Contractor deems the Field Order
requires additional Work, he shall notify the A/E of such prior to proceeding with that Work and
he shall submit a request for Change Order along with a detailed substantiating cost proposal
through the A/E to the Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days. If such conflict, error, omission
or other discrepancy in plans or specifications was reasonably apparent or with reasonable
diligence should have been apparent to the Contractor prior to submitting its bid or Proposal, and
the Contractor failed to submit questions to the A/E in the time and manner required by the
Instructions to Bidders or Request for Proposal, then any claims shall be deemed waived and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time, or entitled to sue the Owner
based on such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy. If the Contractor performs any Work,
or is delayed in performing any Work, where such Work involves a conflict, error, omission, or
other discrepancy in the plans and specifications that the Contractor knew about, or with
reasonable diligence should have known about, and fails to notify the A/E and Owner as required,
the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such performance or delay and shall bear all
costs attributable to correcting any Work requiring correction or to any delay, and such conflict,
error, omission, or other discrepancy shall not be the basis for a claim, cause of action or right to
sue the Owner.
(c)
In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall
govern. Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is
indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to all other like portions of the Work.
(d)
Where the word "similar" appears on the drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and
not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their
connection with other parts of the Work.
(e)
The specifications are divided into several parts, or sections, for convenience only, since the entire
specifications must be considered as a whole. The divisions of the specifications are not intended
to control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to limit the Work
performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of the
trades, Subcontractors and vendors engaged in the Work and for the compensation of the trades,
Subcontractors and vendors for the Work performed.
(f)
Measurements or dimensions shown on the drawings for Site features, utilities and structures shall
be verified at the Site by the Contractor before commencing the Work. The Contractor shall not
scale measurements or dimensions from the drawings. If there are discrepancies, the
Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. If new Work is to connect to, match with or be provided in
existing Work, the Contractor shall verify the actual existing conditions and necessary dimensions
prior to ordering or fabrication.
(g)
As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner one copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop or setting drawings, Change Orders and other
modifications (collectively referred to herein as "As-Built Drawings") in good order and marked
to record all changes as they occur during construction. These shall be available to the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Inspector, the Owner's other inspectors and to the
Owner's testing personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during
construction to record all variations made during construction. The representation of such
variations shall include such supplementary notes, symbols, legends, and details as may be
necessary to clearly show the as-built construction.
25
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(h)
24.
CO-7
Record Drawings: Upon completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor
shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer, for preparation of the Record Drawings, one complete set
of "As-Built Drawings" referred to in the preceding subsection.
SUBMITTALS
(a)
The Contractor shall submit a listing of all Submittals required by the Architect/Engineer or which
the Contractor identifies as necessary, fixing the dates for the submission of shop or setting
drawings, samples and product data. The listing shall be in a format acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all Submittals with the Owner's Project Code
Number as required by Section 2(f).
(b)
Submittals shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval if required by the
specifications or if requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. No part of the Work dealt
with by a Submittal shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor, save at his own
risk, until such approval has been given.
Working drawings, shop drawings and/or submittals for fire protection, fire alarm, fire detection
and security systems shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Building Official prior to
ordering, fabricating or installing such systems. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
obtaining such approval. No part of the Work involving such systems shall be ordered, fabricated
or installed by the Contractor until such approval has been obtained.
(c)
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for approval the name of the manufacturer,
the model number, and other identifying data and information respecting the performance,
capacity, nature and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment which the
Contractor contemplates incorporating in the Work. When Submittals are required by this Contract
for materials, the Contractor shall furnish full information concerning the material or articles
which he contemplates incorporating in the Work. When required, samples shall be submitted for
approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment,
material and articles installed or used without required approval shall be at the risk of subsequent
rejection.
(d)
Unless otherwise indicated or required elsewhere in the specifications, shop drawings shall be
submitted in the form of one reproducible tracing and three blue line or black line prints. Catalog
cuts, product data and other non-reproducible literature, except certificates, shall be submitted in
six (6) copies minimum, of which three (3) will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and the
remainder will be returned to the Contractor. As is mutually agreeable to the Owner,
Architect/Engineer, and Contractor, Submittals may be provided in electronic format in lieu of
hardcopy format.
(e)
Submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal which shall list the Project Code
Number, the Submittals included, the specification section number applicable to each, and the date
shown on each Submittal. Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each
Submittal shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and/or optional feature proposed
to be incorporated into the Project. Cross reference to the plans or specifications as needed to
identify the use for which the item or component is intended.
(f)
The Contractor shall check the Submittals for compliance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall clearly note in writing any and all items which deviate from the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Reasons for deviation shall be included with the
Submittal. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for checking all dimensions and coordinating
all materials and trades to ensure that the components or products proposed, individually or in
26
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
combination, will fit in the space available and that they will be compatible with other components
or products provided.
(g)
After checking each submittal, the Contractor shall stamp each sheet of the Submittal with the
Contractor's review stamp. Data submitted in a bound volume or on one sheet printed on two
sides, may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only. The Contractor's review stamp shall be
worded as follows:
The equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into
this Project, is in compliance with the Contract drawings and specifications unless otherwise shown in
bold face type or lettering and listed on a page or pages headed "DEPARTURES FROM DRAWINGS
AND SPECIFICATIONS", and can be installed in the allocated spaces.
Reviewed by _______________________________________ Date ____________________
The person signing the review stamp shall be the person designated in writing by the Contractor as
having that authority. (A copy of such designation shall be forwarded to the A/E prior to or with
the first Submittal.) The signature on the stamped review statement shall be handwritten in ink, or
in the case of electronic submittals, electronically signed in accordance with §59.1-479 et seq. of
the Code of Virginia. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
(h)
The Contractor shall forward all Submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to
allow reasonable time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking.
(i)
If a Submittal indicates a departure from the Contract requirements, the Architect/Engineer may
reject the Submittal or, if he deems it to have merit, may recommend it to the Owner, who shall
approve or reject it as the Owner, in its sole discretion, sees fit. The departure from the Contract
requirements shall be further authorized by a Change Order, if a reduction or increase in the
Contract Price is appropriate.
(j)
The Architect/Engineer is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Contractor, to verify that the
Submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and
specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and
materials shown in Submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the
Submittals comply with the Contract Documents.
(k)
The Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals. Approval of the Contractor's
Submittals by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of complying with the
Contract and all drawings and specifications, except as changed by Change Order.
(l)
The plans and/or specifications may indicate that the Architect/Engineer designed or detailed a
portion of the plans around a particular product (most commonly a piece of equipment). Should a
different product be proposed by the Contractor and accepted, all modifications, rerouting,
relocations and variations required for proper installation and coordination to comply with the
design concept and requirements of the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. If the plans were noted as designed or
detailed around a particular product and/or if a product is named when a "brand name or equal"
specification has been used, this is not intended to favor or preclude the use of other products
pursuant to Section 26 of these General Conditions. Rather such design merely acknowledges the
reality that in many instances the Architect/Engineer must have a basis to design and detail around
for dimensions and characteristics of a product or system.
(m)
Additional Submittal requirements are shown in the specifications.
27
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
25.
26.
CO-7
FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES
(a)
The Contractor shall obtain all permits, except the Building Permit, and pay for all fees and
charges necessary for temporary access and public right-of-way blockage or use, for temporary
connections to utilities and for the use of property (other than the Site) for storage of materials and
other purposes unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
(b)
Certain projects such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings will usually
have water and electric service to the building. In those instances, water and electric power, if
required for the Work under the Contract, will be furnished by the Owner subject to reasonable
use by the Contractor, only to the extent and capacity of present services. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing required connections, temporary wiring, piping, etc. to these services in
a safe manner and in accordance with applicable codes. All temporary wire, pipe, etc. shall be
removed before the Substantial Completion inspection. Acceptance by the Contractor of the use of
Owner's water and electricity constitutes a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to
the Contractor for whatever damages which may result from power and water outages or voltage
variations.
(c)
The Owner shall pay any connection charges for permanent utility connections directly to the
utility Supplier. The Contractor shall coordinate such connections with the utility Supplier.
(d)
It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor, either directly or through his Subcontractors, shall provide and pay for all material,
labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, telephone and other services or facilities of every
nature whatsoever necessary to execute completely and deliver the Work within the Contract Time
for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date.
(e)
The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities including Contractor’s office space, Owner’s
Project Inspector office space (if required by the specifications), toilet facilities, and storage space,
as required for the operations and the protection of the material and work. Number, sizes and
locations shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Sanitary facilities shall be plumbed into an
approved waste treatment system or shall be an approved type of chemical toilet and shall be
regularly serviced.
EQUALS
(a)
Brand names: Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make or
manufacturer denotes the characteristics, quality, workmanship, economy of operation and
suitability for the intended purpose of the article desired, but does not restrict the Contractor to the
specific brand, make, or manufacturer; it is set forth to convey to the Contractor the general style,
type, character and quality of the article specified.
(b)
Equal materials, equipment or assemblies: Whenever in these Contract Documents, a particular
brand, make of material, device or equipment is shown or specified, such brand, make of material,
device or equipment shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other brand, make or
manufacturer of a product, assembly or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer
is the equal of that specified, considering quality, capabilities, workmanship, configuration,
economy of operation, useful life, compatibility with design of the Work, and suitability for the
intended purpose, will be accepted unless rejected by the Owner as not being equal.
(c)
Substitute materials, equipment or assemblies: The Contractor may propose to substitute a
material, product, equipment, or assembly which deviates from the requirements of the Contract
28
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Documents but which the Contractor deems will perform the same function and have equal
capabilities, service life, economy of operations, and suitability for the intended purpose. The
proposal must include any cost differentials proposed. The Owner will have the A/E provide an
initial evaluation of such proposed substitutes and provide a recommendation on acceptability and
indicate the A/E's redesign fee to incorporate the substitution in the design. If the proposed
substitute is acceptable to the Owner, a Change Order will be proposed to the Contractor to accept
the substitute and to deduct the cost of the A/E redesign fee and the proposed cost savings from
the Contract Price. The Owner shall have the right to limit or reject substitutions at its sole
discretion.
(d)
27.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all changes in the Work necessary to adapt and
accommodate any equal or substitute product which it uses. The necessary changes shall be made
at the Contractor's expense.
AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS
If a brand name, product, or model number included in the Contract Documents is not available on the
present market, alternate equal products or model numbers may be proposed by the Contractor through the
Architect/Engineer for approval by the Owner.
28.
CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS
No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or
Supplier, subject to any security interest, installment or sales contract or any other agreement or lien by
which an interest is retained by the seller or is given to a secured party. The Contractor warrants that he has
clear and good title to all materials and supplies which he uses in the Work or for which he accepts
payment in whole or in part.
29.
STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP
(a)
Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all equipment, material, and accessories
incorporated in the Work are to be new and in first class condition.
(b)
Unless specifically approved by the Owner or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall not
incorporate into the Work any materials containing asbestos or any material known by the industry
to be hazardous to the health of building construction workers, maintenance workers, or
occupants. If the Contractor becomes aware that a material required by the Contract contains
asbestos or other hazardous materials, he shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer
immediately and shall take no further steps to acquire or install any such material without first
obtaining Owner approval.
(c)
All workmanship shall be of the highest quality found in the building industry in every respect. All
items of Work shall be done by craftsmen or tradesmen skilled in the particular task or activity to
which they are assigned. In the acceptance or rejection of Work, no allowance will be made for
lack of skill on the part of workmen. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner or other inspecting authorities) shall be removed and replaced at
Contractor's expense such that the Work conforms to the highest quality standards of the trades
concerned, or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or other
inspecting authority, as applicable.
(d)
Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where specified items are supplied with
the manufacturer's printed instructions, recommendations, or directions for installation, or where
such instructions, recommendations, or directions are available, installation of the specified items
shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless those instructions
29
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
contradict the plans or specifications, in which case the Architect/Engineer will be notified for an
interpretation and decision.
30.
31.
(e)
Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where reference is made to specific codes
or standards governing the installation of specified items, installation shall in all cases be in strict
accordance with the referenced codes and standards. Where no reference is made to specific codes
or standards, installation shall conform to the generally recognized applicable standards for firstclass installation of the specific item to be installed. Contractors are expected to be proficient and
skilled in their respective trades and knowledgeable of the Codes and Standards of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and
Health Act (OSHA) and other codes and standards applicable to installations and associated work
by his trade.
(f)
Where the manufacturer's printed instructions are not available for installation of specific items,
where specific codes or standards are not referenced to govern the installation or specific items, or
where there is uncertainty on the part of the Contractor concerning the installation procedures to
be followed or the quality of workmanship to be maintained in the installation of specific items,
the Contractor shall consult the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation procedures or
the specific standards governing the quality of workmanship the Contractor proposes to follow or
maintain during the installation of the items in question.
(g)
During and/or at the completion of installation of any items, the tests designated in the plans or
specifications necessary to assure proper and satisfactory functioning for its intended purpose shall
be performed by the Contractor or by its Subcontractor responsible for the completed installation.
All costs for such testing are to be included in the Contract Price. If required by the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall furnish prior to final inspection the manufacturers' certificates
evidencing that products meet or exceed applicable performance, warranty and other requirements,
and certificates that products have been properly installed and tested.
WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
(a)
The Contractor warrants that, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated
in the Work under the Contract shall be new, in first class condition, and in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that all workmanship shall be of the highest
quality and in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be performed by persons
qualified at their respective trades.
(b)
Work not conforming to these warranties shall be considered defective.
(c)
This warranty of materials and workmanship is separate and independent from and in addition to
any of the Contractor's other guarantees or obligations in the Contract or under Virginia law.
USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
(a)
The Contractor shall:
(1)
Perform the Work in such a manner as not to interrupt or interfere with the operation of
any existing activity on, or in proximity to, the Site or with the Work of any other
separate contractor;
(2)
Store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the Site
of the Work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his Work or the work of any
other separate contractor; and
30
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(3)
Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety
of that portion of the Work.
(b)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to effect all
cutting, filling or patching of the Work required to make the same conform to the plans and
specifications, and, except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter
the Work of any other separate contractor. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any
portion of the Work or Site, including existing improvements, unless called for by the Contract.
(c)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to clean up
frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his operations, to the end that
at all times the Site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance. No such refuse,
rubbish, scrap material and debris shall be left within the completed Work nor buried on the
building Site, but shall be removed from the Site and properly disposed of in a licensed landfill or
otherwise as required by law.
(d)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), before Final
Payment or such prior time as the Owner may require, to remove all surplus material, false Work,
temporary structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every
nature resulting from his operations and to put the Site in a neat, orderly condition; to thoroughly
clean and leave reasonably dust free all finished surfaces including all equipment, piping, etc., on
the interior of all buildings included in the Contract; and to clean thoroughly all glass installed
under the Contract, including the removal of all paint and mortar splatters and other defacements.
If the Contractor fails to clean up at the time required herein, the Owner may do so and charge the
costs incurred thereby to the Contractor in accordance with Section 10 (b) of these General
Conditions.
(e)
32.
The Contractor shall have, On-Site, an employee certified by the Department of Conservation and
Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber who shall be responsible for the installation,
inspection and maintenance of erosion control and stormwater management measures and devices.
The Contractor shall prevent Site soil erosion, the runoff of silt and/or debris carrying water from
the Site, and the blowing of debris off the Site in accordance with the applicable requirements and
standards of the Contract and the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation's Erosion
and Sediment Control Regulations and the Virginia Stormwater Management Regulations.
TEMPORARY ROADS
Temporary roads, if required, shall be established and maintained until permanent roads are
accepted, then removed and the area restored to the conditions required by the Contract
Documents. Crushed rock, paving and other road materials from temporary roads shall not be left
on the Site unless permission is received from the Owner to bury the same at a location and depth
approved by the Owner.
33.
SIGNS
The Contractor may, at his option and without cost to the Owner, erect signs acceptable to the
Owner on the Site for the purpose of identifying and giving directions to the job. No signs shall be
erected without prior approval of the Owner as to design and location.
34.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
31
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
35.
CO-7
(a)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, both directly and through his Subcontractors, to take every
reasonable precaution at all times for the protection of all persons and property which may come
on the Site or be affected by the Contractor's Work.
(b)
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Any violation of these requirements or
duties or any potential safety hazard that is brought to the attention of the Contractor by the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or any other persons shall be immediately abated.
(c)
The provisions of all rules and regulations governing health and safety as adopted by the Safety
Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia, issued by the Department of Labor and
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia, shall apply to all Work under this Contract.
(d)
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his Work from damage and
shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He
shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except as may be directly and solely due to
errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. The Contractor
shall adequately protect adjacent property to prevent any damage to it or loss of use and enjoyment
by its owners. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and
other facilities for protection as required by public authority, local conditions, or the Contract.
(e)
In an emergency affecting the health, safety or life of persons or of the Work, or of the adjoining
property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer
or the Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Also, should he,
to prevent threatened loss or injury, be instructed or authorized to act by the Architect/Engineer or
the Owner, he shall so act immediately, without appeal. Any additional compensation or extension
of time claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency work shall be determined as
provided by Section 38 of these General Conditions.
(f)
When necessary for the proper protection of the Work, temporary heating of a type approved by
the Architect/Engineer must be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, unless
otherwise specified.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall suspend activity on and protect any portion of the Work that may be subject
to damage by climatic conditions.
36.
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
(a)
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Owner will make partial payments to the
Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for
Payment, Form CO-12, showing the estimate of the Work performed during the preceding
calendar month or work period, as recommended by the Architect/Engineer. When evaluating the
Contractor's Form CO-12, the Architect/Engineer will consider the value of the Work in place, the
value of approved and properly stored materials, the status of the Work on the critical path with
regard to the Time for Completion, and the estimated value of the Work necessary to achieve Final
Completion. The Architect/Engineer will schedule a monthly pay meeting to occur no earlier than
the 25th day of the month represented by the payment request or not later than the 5th day of the
following month. The Contractor shall submit his monthly estimate of Work completed on Form
CO-12 in accordance with the Contract between the Owner and Contractor so that it is received by
the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Project Manager at least one work day prior to the date
scheduled by the Architect/Engineer for the monthly pay meeting. The Owner will review the
estimate with the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor at the monthly pay meeting, which shall
be considered the receipt date, and may approve any or all of the estimate of Work for payment. In
32
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
preparing estimates, the material delivered to the Site and preparatory Work done shall be taken
into consideration, if properly documented as required by Section 20 of these General Conditions,
or as may be required by the Architect/Engineer so that quantities may be verified. In addition to
material delivered to the Site, material such as large pieces of equipment and items purchased
specifically for the Project, but stored off the Site within the Commonwealth of Virginia, may be
considered for payment, provided all of the following are accomplished prior to the submission of
the monthly payment request in which payment for such materials is requested:
(1)
The Contractor must notify the Owner in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to the
submission of the payment request, through the Architect/Engineer, that specific items
will be stored off Site in a designated, secured place within the Commonwealth of
Virginia. The Schedule of Values must be detailed to indicate separately both the value of
the material and the labor/installation for trades requesting payment for stored materials.
By giving such notification and by requesting payment for material stored off Site, the
Contractor warrants that the storage location is safe and suitable for the type of material
stored and that the materials are identified as being the property of the Contractor, and
agrees that loss of materials stored off the Site shall not relieve the Contractor of the
obligation to timely furnish these types and quantities of materials for the Project and
meet the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, subject to Section 43 (b) of
these General Conditions. If the storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site, the
Contractor may be required to reimburse the Owner for the cost incurred for travel to the
storage location to verify the Contractor's request for payment for materials stored off
Site.
(2)
Such notification, as well as the payment request, shall:
(a)
Itemize the quantity of such materials and document with invoices showing the
cost of said materials;
(b)
Indicate the identification markings used on the materials, which shall clearly
reference the materials to the particular project;
(c)
Identify the specific location of the materials, which must be within reasonable
proximity to the Site and within the Commonwealth of Virginia;
(d)
Include a letter from the Contractor's Surety which confirms that the Surety on
the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond has been
notified of the request for payment of materials stored off the Site and agrees
that the materials are covered by the bond; and
(e)
Include a certificate of all-risk builder's risk insurance in an amount not less than
the fair market value of the materials, which shall name the Owner and the
Contractor as co-insureds.
(3)
The Architect/Engineer shall indicate, in writing, to the Owner that Submittals for such
materials have been reviewed and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, that
the stored materials meet the requirement of the plans and specifications, and that such
materials conform to the approved Submittals. Should the A/E deem it necessary to visit
the storage site to make such review, the Contractor shall bear the costs incurred
therewith.
(4)
The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, shall notify the Contractor in writing of its
agreement to prepayment for such materials.
33
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(5)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, through the Architect/Engineer, when
the materials are to be transferred to the Site and when the materials are received at the
Site.
(b)
Payment will not be made for materials or equipment stored on or off the Site which are not
scheduled for incorporation into the Work within the six months next following submission of the
request for payment, unless the Contractor has the prior consent of the Owner, which consent may
be granted or withheld by the Owner in its discretion if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is not
necessary to procure the materials more than six months in advance of use to assure their
availability when needed.
(c)
No payment shall be made to the Contractor until:
(1)
The Contractor furnishes to the Owner its Social Security Number (SSN) if an individual,
or its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) if a proprietorship, partnership,
corporation or other legal entity.
(2)
Certificates of Insurance or other satisfactory evidence of compliance by the Contractor
with all the requirements of Section 11 (and Section 12 if applicable) of these General
Conditions have been delivered to the Owner.
(3)
Copies of any certificates of insurance required of a Subcontractor under Section 11 have
been delivered to the Owner for payments based on Work performed by a Subcontractor.
(4)
The Contractor has (i) submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner
in accordance with Section 19(a), (ii) submitted a fully complete Project schedule
accepted by the Owner in accordance with Section 19(a), (iii) maintained the monthly bar
graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d), or (iv) provided a recovery schedule
pursuant to Section 19(e), as each of them may be required.
(d)
In making such partial payments, five percent (5%) of each payment to the Contractor shall be
retained until Final Completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract, unless
otherwise provided by any law, regulation or program of the federal government. Such retainage
shall be held to assure faithful performance of the Contract and may also be used as a fund to
deduct amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, including, but not limited to, payment to the
Owner of all moneys due for deductive change orders, credits, uncorrected Defective Work,
interest, damages, and the like. (§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia) The Owner may, at its sole
discretion, agree on an item by item basis to release the retainage on items which are fully 100%
complete and which have accepted by the Owner as being tested and complete and on which no
further action or work will be required. Retainage which is released by the Owner shall be
distributed by the Contractor in conformance with Section 37 of these General Conditions.
(e)
All material and Work for which partial payments are made shall thereupon become the sole
property of the Owner, but this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole
responsibility for all materials and Work, including those for which payment has been made, or for
the restoration of any damaged materials or Work. Nor shall this provision serve as a waiver of the
right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the Contract.
(f)
The Final Payment, which shall include the retainage, less any amounts due to or claimed by the
Owner, shall not become due until the Architect/Engineer and the Owner agree that Final
Completion has been achieved and until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner through the
Architect/Engineer a Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and an
Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers of
either labor or materials have been paid all sums claimed by them for Work performed or
34
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
materials furnished in connection with this Project less retainage. Amounts due the Owner which
may be withheld from the Final Payment may include, but are not limited to, amounts due
pursuant to Section 3(i), Section 16(a)-(d), Section 31(d), costs incurred to repair or replace
Defective Work, costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions or
omissions of those for whom the Contractor is responsible, delay damages under Section 43(h),
and any liquidated or actual damages. If all Subcontractors and Suppliers of labor and materials
have not been paid the full amount claimed by them, the Contractor shall list each to which an
agreed amount of money is due or which has a claim in dispute. With respect to all such
Subcontractors and Suppliers, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, along with the Affidavit
of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), an affidavit from each such Subcontractor and Supplier
stating the amount of their subcontract or supply contract, the percentage of completion, the
amounts paid to them by the Contractor and the dates of payment, the amount of money still due if
any, any interest due the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to Section 37(b) below, and whether
satisfactory arrangements have been made for the payment of said amounts. If no agreement can
be reached between the Contractor and one or more Subcontractors or Suppliers as to the amounts
owed to the Subcontractors or Suppliers, the Owner may, in its discretion, pay such portion of the
moneys due to the Contractor which is claimed by the Subcontractor or Supplier into a Virginia
Court or Federal Court sitting in Virginia, in the manner provided by law. Said payment into court
shall be deemed a payment to the Contractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed as
creating any obligation or contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or
Supplier, and the Owner shall not be liable to any Subcontractor or Supplier on account of any
failure or delay of the Owner in complying with the terms hereof.
(g)
Upon successful completion of the final inspection and all Work required by the Contract,
including but not limited to the delivery of As-Built drawings, equipment manuals, written
warranties, acceptance of the Work by the Owner and the delivery of the affidavits required in
Section 36(f) of these General Conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall deliver the written
Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) to the Owner, with a copy to
the Contractor, stating the entire amount of Work performed and compensation earned by the
Contractor, including extra work and compensation therefor. The Owner may accept the Work for
occupancy or use while asserting claims against the Contractor; disputing the amount of
compensation due to the Contractor; disputing the quality of the Work, its completion, or its
compliance with the Contract Documents; or any other reason.
(h)
Unless there is a dispute about the compensation due to the Contractor, Defective Work, quality of
the Work, compliance with the Contract Documents, completion itself, claims by the Owner, other
matters in contention between the parties, or unless monies are withheld pursuant to the
Comptroller's Debt Setoff Program, within thirty (30) days after receipt and acceptance of the
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) in proper form by the
Architect/Engineer at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, the
Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amount approved by the Architect/Engineer, less all prior
payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. In the case of Final
Payment, the completed Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), the Certificate of
Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and the Certificate of Completion by the
Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) shall accompany the final Schedule of Values and Certificate
for Payment (Form CO-12) which is forwarded to the Owner for payment. The date on which
payment is due shall be referred to as the Payment Date. In the event of disputes, payment shall be
mailed on or before the Payment Date for amounts and Work not in dispute, subject to any set offs
claimed by the Owner; provided, however in instances where further appropriations are required
by the General Assembly or where the issuance of further bonds is required, in which case,
payment shall be made within thirty (30) days after the effective date of such appropriation or
within thirty (30) days after the receipt of bond proceeds by the Owner. All prior estimates and
payments including those relating to extra Work may be corrected and adjusted in any payment
and shall be corrected and adjusted in the Final Payment. In the event that any request for payment
(CO-12) by the Contractor contains a defect or impropriety, the Owner shall notify the Contractor
35
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
of any defect or impropriety which would prevent payment by the Payment Date, within five (5)
days after receipt of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) by the
Owner from the Architect/Engineer.
37.
(i)
Interest shall accrue on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor which remain unpaid
seven (7) days following the Payment Date. Said interest shall accrue at the discounted ninety-day
U.S. Treasury bill rate as established by the Weekly Auction and as reported in the publication
entitled The Wall Street Journal on the weekday following each such Weekly Auction. During the
period of time when the amounts due to the Contractor remain unpaid following the seventh (7)
day after the Payment Date, the interest accruing shall fluctuate on a weekly basis and shall be that
established by the immediately prior Weekly Auction. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to gather and substantiate the applicable weekly interest rates to the satisfaction of the
Owner and to calculate to the satisfaction of the Owner the interest due. In no event shall the rate
of interest charge exceed the rate of interest charged pursuant to §58.1-1812 of the Code of
Virginia. No interest shall accrue on retainage or when payment is delayed because of
disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or timeliness
of the Work, including, but not limited to, compliance with Contract Documents or the accuracy
of any Request for Payment received. This exception to the accrual of interest stated in the
preceding sentence shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment which is actually the
subject of such a disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of such disagreement.
Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted, however, to prevent the withholding of retainage to
assure faithful performance of the Contract. These same provisions relating to payment of interest
to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due
from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims
by the Owner. The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of
payment to the addressee.
(j)
The acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and operate as a release to the
Owner of all claims by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Suppliers, and of all liability to the
Contractor whatever, including liability for all things done or furnished in connection with this
Work, except for things done or furnished which are the subject of unresolved claims for which
the Contractor has filed a timely written notice of intent, provided a claim is submitted no later
than sixty (60) days after Final Payment. Acceptance of any interest payment by the Contractor
shall be a release of the Owner from claims by the Contractor for late payment.
(k)
No certificate for payment issued by the Architect/Engineer, and no payment, final or otherwise,
no certificate of completion, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner,
shall be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract, nor shall the
same relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or Defective Work or operate to
release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Standard
Performance Bond and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§ 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia)
Under § 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, the Contractor is obligated to:
(a)
Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work
performed by the Subcontractor or Supplier under this Contract,
(1)
Pay the Subcontractor or Supplier for the proportionate share of the total payment
received from the Owner attributable to the Work performed by the Subcontractor or the
materials furnished by the Supplier under this Contract; or
(2)
Notify the Subcontractor or Supplier, in writing, of his intention to withhold all or a part
of the Subcontractor or Supplier's payment with the reason for nonpayment;
36
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(b)
Pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain
unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for
Work performed by the Subcontractor or materials furnished by the Supplier under this contract,
except for amounts withheld as allowed under subsection (a) (2) of this Section.
(c)
Include in each of his subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include in each of
its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the
same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower tier subcontractor. Each
Subcontractor shall include with its invoice to, or request for payment from, the Contractor, a
certification that that Subcontractor has paid each of its suppliers and lower tier subcontractors
their proportionate share of previous payments received from the Contractor attributable to the
Work performed or the materials furnished by it under this Contract.
The Contractor's obligation to pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to subsection
(b) of this Section is not an obligation of the Owner. A modification to this Contract shall not be
made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A Contractor's cost
reimbursement claim shall not include any amount for reimbursement of such interest charge.
38.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
(a)
The Owner may at any time, by written order utilizing the Commonwealth of Virginia Change
Order Form CO-11 and without notice to the sureties, make changes in the Work which are within
the general scope of the Contract, except that no change will be made which will increase the total
Contract Price to an amount more than twenty percent (20%) in excess of the original Contract
Price without notice to sureties. At the time of the Preconstruction Meeting described in Section
50(b), the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other in writing of their designees
authorized to accept and/or approve changes to the Contract Price and of any limits to each
designee's authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this
Contract is in effect, the Contractor or Owner with such a change shall give written notice to the
other within seven (7) calendar days, utilizing the procedures set forth in these General
Conditions. The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner's designee is
limited by Virginia Code §2.2-4309 and any other applicable statute.
In making any change, the charge or credit for the change shall be determined by one of the
following methods as selected by the Owner:
(1)
Fixed Price: By a mutually agreed fixed amount change to the Contract Price and/or
time allowed for completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by
documentation itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials, and
equipment required as well as any mark-up used. The price change shall include the
Contractor's reasonable overhead and profit, including overhead for any unreasonable
delay arising from or related to the Change Order and/or the change in the Work. See
Subsections (d), (e) and (f), below.
(2)
Unit Price: By using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each
part of the Work which is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the
change commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the
applicable unit price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit
price if none was provided in the Contract. No additional percentage markup for
overhead or profit shall be added to the unit prices.
(3)
Cost Reimbursement: By ordering the Contractor to perform the changed Work on a
cost reimbursement basis by issuing two Change Orders citing this Subsection, an
initiating Change Order, authorizing the changed Work, and a confirming Change Order
37
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
approving the additional cost and time for the changed Work. The initiating Change
Order shall:
(i)
Describe the scope or parameters of the change in the Work;
(ii)
Describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment and the method of
measuring the quantity of work performed;
(iii) Address the impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion;
(iv) Order the Contractor to proceed with the change to the Work;
(v)
Order the Contractor to keep in a form acceptable to the Owner, an accurate,
itemized account of the actual cost of the change in the Work, including, but not
limited to, the actual costs of labor, materials, equipment, and supplies;
(vi) Order the Contractor to annotate a copy of the Project schedule to accurately show
the status of the Work at the time this first Change Order is issued, to show the start
and finish dates of the changed Work, and the status of the Work when the changed
Work is completed; and
(vii) State that a confirming Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the
ordered changed in the Work into the Contract Price and any change in the Contract
Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date.
The Contractor shall sign the initiating Change Order acknowledging he has been ordered
to proceed with the change in the Work. The Contractor's signature on each initiating
Change Order citing this Subsection 38(a)(3) as the method for determining the cost of
the Work shall not constitute the Contractor's agreement on the cost or time impact of the
ordered Work.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall not
exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts (based upon rates established by the US
Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, or other generally recognized cost data
publication), materials, and equipment in the locality of the Project, may include only
those items listed as allowable in Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs
listed as not allowable in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily
basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to
determine the cost of the change to the Work.
Within fourteen (14) days after the conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and
the Owner shall reach agreement on (i) a cost for the ordered Work, based on the records
kept and the Contractor's allowance for overhead and profit determined in accordance
with the provisions set forth in Subsections 38(d), (e), and (f) below; and (ii) the change
in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, if necessary, as a
result of the ordered Work. Such costs and time shall be incorporated into a confirming
Change Order which references the initiating Change Order. If agreement on the cost and
time of the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the
Contractor may submit a claim for the disputed cost or time as provided for in Section 47.
(4)
By issuing a unilateral change order in the amount deemed appropriate by the Owner for
the Work. If the Contractor objects to the amount or scope of the change order then the
Contractor may within the 14 days of the date of the change order file a claim for the
disputed amount as provided for in section 47.
38
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(b)
CO-7
The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing
within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable
time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including
any increase or decrease in the Contract time and price. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner
an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in
Contract Price.
The Owner shall review the Contractor's proposal and respond to the Contractor within thirty (30)
days of receipt. If a change to the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date are agreed upon, both parties shall sign the Change Order. If the Contract Price and Time for
Completion or Contract Completion Date are not agreed upon, the Owner may direct the
Contractor to proceed under Subsection 38(a)(3), above. Change Orders shall be effective when
signed by both parties, unless approval by the Governor or his designee is required, in which event
the Change Order shall be effective when signed by the Governor or his designee.
(c)
In figuring changes, any instructions for measurement of quantities set forth in the Contract shall
be followed.
(d)
Overhead and profit for both additive and deductive changes in the Work (other than changes
covered by unit prices) shall be paid by applying the specified percentage markups only on the net
cost of the changed Work (i.e. difference in cost between original and changed Work excluding
overhead and profit). Said percentages for overhead and profit shall reasonably approximate the
Contractor’s overhead and profit, but shall not exceed the percentages for each category listed
below:
(e)
(1)
If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work, the Subcontractor's mark-up for
overhead and profit on the Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent
(15%). The Contractor's mark-up for overhead and profit on the Subcontractor's price
shall be a maximum of ten percent (10%).
(2)
If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work, its markup for overhead and profit
on the changed Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%).
(3)
If a Sub-subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the changed Work, the Subsubcontractor's markup on that Work shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The
markup for overhead and profit on a sub-subcontractor's Work by the Contractor and all
intervening tiers of Subcontractors shall not exceed a total of ten percent (10%).
(4)
Where Work is deleted from the Contract prior to commencement of that Work without
substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price
attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Price. However, in the
event that material Submittals have been approved and orders placed for said materials, a
lesser amount, but in no case less than eighty percent (80%) of the Contract Price
attributable to that Work, shall be deducted from the Contract Price. The credit to the
Owner for reduced premiums on labor and material bonds and performance bonds shall
in all cases be one hundred percent (100%).
Allowable costs for changes in the Work may include but are not limited to the following:
(1)
Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including
salaries and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime
premiums, if such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner.
39
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(2)
Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation and
storage, if applicable. If applicable, all cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor,
unless the Owner deposits funds with the Contractor to make such payments, and all
trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from the sale of surplus materials shall
accrue to the Owner.
(3)
Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in
accomplishing the Work. If rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work,
the cost shall be the rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the
Owner shall have the right to approve. If owned by the Contractor, the costs shall be a
reasonable price based upon the life expectancy of the equipment and the purchase price
of the equipment. If applicable, transportation costs may be included.
(4)
Costs of increases in premiums for the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond and
the Standard Performance Bond, provided coverage for the cost of the change in the
Work results in such increased costs. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide
proof of his notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety's
agreement to include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium
shall be an allowable cost but shall not be marked up.
(5)
Contractor and Subcontractor overhead costs as set forth in Subsection (d) markups
above.
(6)
Agreed Compensation for Overhead for Changes to Time for Completion or
Contract Completion Date for Changes to the Work: If the change in the Work also
changes the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date by adding days to
complete the Work, an itemized accounting of the following direct Site overhead and
home office overhead and other indirect overhead expenses set forth in subparagraphs (i)
and (ii) below may be considered as allowable costs for compensation in addition to those
shown above:
(i)
Direct Site Overhead Expenses:
The Contractor’s per diem expenses, as shown by the itemized accounting, for
the following allowable direct Site overhead expenses: The Site superintendent's
pro-rata salary, temporary Site office trailer, and temporary Site utilities
including basic telephone service, electricity, heat, water, and sanitary / toilet
facilities for each day added. All other direct expenses are covered by and
included in the Subsection 38(d) markups above.
(ii)
Home Office and Other Indirect Overhead Expenses:
A five percent (5%) markup on the above direct Site overhead expenses will be
allowed as compensation for the Contractor’s home office overhead and all
other direct or indirect overhead expenses for days added to the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date for a change in the Work. All other
overhead and other direct or indirect overhead expenses are covered by and
included in this markup and the Subsection (d) markups above.
(7)
(f)
Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work with the exception of
those set forth in Subsection 38(f) below.
Allowable costs for changes in the Work shall not include the following:
40
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(g)
CO-7
(1)
Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, their
employees, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including, but not
limited to, costs for the correction of Defective Work, for improper disposal of material,
for equipment wrongly supplied, for delay in performing the Work, or for delay in
obtaining materials or equipment.
(2)
Home office expenses including payroll costs for the Contractor's officers, executives,
administrators, accountants, counsel, timekeepers, clerks, and other similar administrative
personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor's principal
or branch office for general administration of the Work. These costs are deemed overhead
included in the percentage markups allowable in Subsections 38(d) above.
(3)
Home and field office expenses not itemized in Subsection 38(e)(6) above. Such items
include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor's home and branch offices,
Contractor's capital expenses, interest on Contractor's capital used for the Work, charges
for delinquent payments, small tools, incidental job costs, rent, utilities, telephone and
office equipment, and other general overhead expenses.
(4)
Other items reasonably determined by the Owner to not be allowed.
All Change Orders, except the "initial" Change Orders authorizing work citing Subsection
38(a)(3) procedures, must state that the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date is not changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. The old Time
for Completion and, if changed, the new Time for Completion must be stated.
If the Contractor requests an extension to the Time for Completion or a later Contract Completion
Date, he must provide written justification for the extension to the Architect/Engineer and to the
Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time
required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior change
orders or amendments to the Contract, not just an increase or decrease in the time needed to
complete some portion of the total Work. When a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no
extension to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be allowed unless, and
then only to the extent that, the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical path
beyond the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. If approved, the increase in time
required to complete the Work shall be added to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date.
The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time
required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the Bar Graph Schedule or on the CPM
Schedule, whichever is appropriate. The Contractor may submit a request to decrease, by Change
Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date under the procedures and subject to
the considerations set forth in Section 19(f). No request for such decrease shall be considered for
approval unless the proposed shorter schedule is otherwise acceptable under Sections 19(b) or (c),
whichever is applicable. The Change Order decreasing the Time for Completion or changing the
Contract Completion Date must be signed by both the Owner and the Contractor.
With the exception of Change Orders under Subsection 38(a)(3), which shall arrive at a change to
the Contract Price and any change to time using the procedures set forth therein, each Change
Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change, whether the Change Order is
considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project. Failure to include a
change to time and changes in the Contract Price attributable to the change in time under
Subsections 38(a)(1) or (2) shall waive any change to the time and Contract Price unless the
parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the time related impacts of the
change. Such a determination may be postponed not more than forty-five (45) days to give the
41
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Contractor an opportunity to demonstrate a change in the time and price needed to complete the
Work. During any such postponement, the Work shall proceed, unless the Owner agrees
otherwise.
If at any time there is a delay in the critical path of the Work due to postponement, due to the
Contractor's efforts to justify an extension of the time or an increase in the Contract Price, or due
to the Contractor's refusal to proceed with any of the Work, pending agreement on a change in
time or price, such delay and any Contractor costs resulting from it shall not serve as the basis for
the extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or for an increase in the
Contract Price.
(h)
The acceptance by the Contractor of any payment made by the Owner under a Change Order shall
be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing
to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the
Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of
any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the
Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract, the Standard Performance
Bond, or the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
(i)
Payments will not be made for any Work, labor, or materials performed on a unit price or a
Subsection 38(a)(3) basis until the Contractor has furnished the Owner documents, certified as
true and correct by an authorized officer or agent of the Contractor, evidencing the cost of such
Work, labor, and materials. The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to
be provided by the Contractor.
For Work performed on a Unit Price basis:
(1)
Certified measurements of authorized and approved excavations, over-excavations, fills
and/or backfills, and similar work; and/or
(2)
Certified measurements of piling installed, caissons installed, and similar work; and/or
(3)
Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to
the Site.
For Work performed on a Subsection 38(a)(3) basis:
(1)
Certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours,
rate, and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor, or other worker; and/or
(2)
Equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, or other specified
rate, and extension for each unit of equipment;
(3)
Invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions;
(4)
Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to
the Site;
(5)
Certified measurements of over-excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or
(6)
Transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions.
Requests for payment shall be accompanied and supported by invoices for all l materials used and
for all transportation charges claimed. If materials come from the Contractor's own stock, then an
42
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
affidavit may be furnished, in lieu of invoices, certifying quantities, prices, etc. to support the
actual cost.
39.
EXTRAS
If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Architect/Engineer or by the
Owner, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work which increases the scope of the Contract,
then, except in emergencies endangering life or property, he shall give the Architect/Engineer and
the Owner written notice thereof before proceeding to execute the Work. Said notice shall be
given promptly enough to avoid delaying the Work and in no instance later than fourteen (14)
days after the receipt of such instructions. Should it not be immediately clear to the Contractor that
the change involves extra Work outside the scope of the Contract, written notice shall be sufficient
if given as soon as possible after such realization, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days
after the start of such Work. If the Owner agrees, a Change Order shall be issued as provided in
Section 38 of these General Conditions, and any additional compensation shall be determined by
one of the three (3) methods provided in Subsection 38(a), as selected by the Owner. If the Owner
does not agree, then any claims for compensation for the extra Work shall be filed in accordance
with Section 47.
40.
CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of
ninety (90) days through no fault of the Contractor or anyone employed by him, or if the Owner
should fail to pay to the Contractor within thirty (30) days any sum certified by the
Architect/Engineer when no dispute exists as to the sum due or any provision of the Contract, then
the Contractor may, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice to the Owner and the
Architect/Engineer, stop Work or terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for
the cost of the Work actually performed, together with overhead and profit thereon, but profit on
the Work performed shall be recovered only to the extent that the Contractor can demonstrate that
he would have had profit on the entire Contract if he had completed the Work. The Contractor
may not receive profit or any other type of compensation for parts of the Work not performed. The
Contractor may recover the reasonable cost of physically closing down the Site, but no other costs
of termination. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the
amounts due to the Contractor. In no event shall termination of the Contract by the Contractor
terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
41.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
(a)
If the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for
the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, the
Owner may terminate the Contract. If the Contractor should refuse or should repeatedly fail,
except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled
workmen or proper materials and equipment, or if he should fail to perform the Work in a diligent,
efficient, workmanlike, skillful, and careful manner, or if he should fail or refuse to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to
Subcontractors or Suppliers of material or labor, or if he should disregard laws, ordinances or the
written instructions of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, or otherwise be in substantial
violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may terminate the Contract.
(b)
Prior to termination of the Contract, the Owner shall give the Contractor and his surety ten (10)
days written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of
"Notice") of these General Conditions and allow ten (10) days during which the Contractor and/or
his surety may rectify the basis for the notice. If rectified to the satisfaction of the Owner within
43
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
said ten (10) days, the Owner may rescind its notice of termination. If not, the termination for
cause shall become effective at the end of the ten (10) day notice period without further notice to
the Contractor. In the alternative, the Owner may, in writing, postpone the effective date of the
termination for cause, at its sole discretion, if it should receive reassurances from the Contractor
and/or its surety that the basis for the termination will be remedied in a time and manner which the
Owner finds acceptable. If at any time after such postponement, the Owner determines that
Contractor and/or its surety has not or is not likely to rectify the causes of termination in an
acceptable manner or within the time allowed, then the Owner may immediately terminate the
Contract for cause, without the necessity of further ten (10) day notice, by notifying the Contractor
and his surety in writing of the termination. In no event shall termination for cause terminate the
obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
(c)
Upon termination of the Contract becoming effective, the Owner shall take possession of the Site
and of all materials, tools and equipment thereon and shall proceed as follows:
(1) No Security Provided: If no security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the
Owner shall finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. If the expense of
finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative
services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and
having it completed by others.
(2) Security Provided: If security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the Owner
shall provide Notice to the Surety that termination of the Contract became effective and
proceed as set forth in the Standard Performance Bond, CO-10, Form # DGS-30-084, and the
Terms and Conditions therein. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation
for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price and the penal amount of the Standard Performance Bond, the Contractor shall
pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the
Contract and having it completed by others.
42.
(d)
If it should be judicially determined that the Owner improperly terminated this Contract for cause,
then the termination shall be deemed to be a termination for the convenience of the Owner and the
Contractor’s rights and remedies shall be solely limited to those provided by Section 42 of these
General Conditions.
(e)
Termination of the Contract under this Section is in addition to and without prejudice to any other
right or remedy of the Owner. Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a
waiver of any other right or remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The Owner
may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the
Contractor. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract.
TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
(a)
The Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time without cause upon giving
the Contractor written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition
of "Notice") of these General Conditions. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall
immediately cease Work and remove from the Site all of its labor forces, equipment and such of
its materials as Owner elects not to purchase or to assume in the manner hereinafter provided.
Upon such termination, the Contractor shall take such steps as Owner may require to assign to the
Owner the Contractor's interest in all Subcontracts and purchase orders designated by Owner.
After all such steps have been taken to Owner's satisfaction, the Contractor shall receive as full
compensation for termination and assignment the following:
44
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(1)
Amounts due for Work performed in accordance with the Contract subsequent to the
latest approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) through
the date of termination; and
(2)
All amounts then otherwise due under the terms of this Contract associated with the
Work performed prior to the date of termination; and
(3)
Reasonable compensation for the actual cost of demobilization incurred by the Contractor
as a direct result of such termination.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for lost profits or for any
other type of contractual compensation or damages other than those provided in Subsection 42(a).
The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to
the Contractor. Upon payment of the foregoing, Owner shall have no further obligations to
Contractor of any nature. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Owner for any
consequential damages that may arise from or relate to the Owner’s termination of the Contract
including, but not limited to, damages for loss of revenue, income, profit, business, reputation, or
bonding capacity.
43.
(b)
In no event shall termination for the convenience of the Owner terminate the obligations of the
Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
(c)
Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or
remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The provisions of this Section shall
survive termination of the Contract.
DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME
(a)
Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is delayed at any
time in the progress of the Work by strikes, fires, unusual delays in transportation or unavoidable
casualties, or other causes outside the control of the Owner or the Contractor, with the exception
of delays caused by weather provided for in Section 6, for which the Contractor intends to request
an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may
be, then the Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect/Engineer written notice of the delay
within fourteen (14) days of the inception of the delay. The Contractor shall also give written
notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen
(14) days after such termination. If the Owner agrees with the existence and the impact of the
delay, the Owner shall extend the Time for Completion, the Contract Completion Date or Final
Completion Date, as the case may be, for the length of time that the date for Substantial
Completion or Final Completion was actually delayed thereby, and the Contractor shall not be
charged with liquidated or actual damages for delay during the period of such extension nor shall
the Contractor be due compensation or damages of any kind, under any theory of law, as a result
of such delay, the impact of such delay, or acceleration of Work as a result of such delay. In the
event a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no extension of the Time for Completion or
Contract Completion Date shall be granted unless the Contractor demonstrates a delay in the
critical path of the approved CPM schedule or approved bar graph schedule.
(b)
Excusable Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is unreasonably delayed
at any time in the progress of the Work by any acts or omissions of the Owner, its agents, or
employees due to causes within the Owner's control, and the Contractor intends to request an
extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be,
and/or additional compensation for damages, if any, caused by the delay, then the Contractor shall
notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately at the time of the occurrence giving rise
to the delay by the fastest means available and shall give written notice no later than two (2)
working days after inception of the delay. The Contractor's written notice shall specify the nature
45
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
of the delay claimed by the Contractor, the cause of the delay, and the impact of the delay on the
Contractor's Work schedule. The Owner shall then have three (3) working days to respond to the
Contractor's notice with a resolution, remedy, direction to alleviate the delay, or rejection of the
Contractor’s notice of delay. The Owner’s failure to respond within the time required shall be
deemed to be a rejection of the Contractor’s notice. The Contractor shall also give written notice
to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen (14)
days after such termination. If and to the extent that a delay is caused by or due to the Owner or
A/E taking any actions permitted or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall be entitled to an
extension of time or additional compensation only for the portion of the delay that is unreasonable,
if any.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Non-Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension
of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or to any additional compensation for
delays if and to the extent they are (1) caused by acts, omissions, fault, or negligence of the
Contractor or his Subcontractors, agents or employees or due to foreseeable causes within their
control, including, but not limited to, delays resulting from Defective Work including
workmanship and/or materials, from rejected work which must be corrected before dependent
work can proceed, from Defective Work or rejected work for which corrective action must be
determined before like work can proceed, from incomplete, incorrect, or unacceptable Submittals
or samples, or from the failure to furnish enough properly skilled workers, proper materials or
necessary equipment to diligently perform the work in a timely manner in accordance with the
Project schedule; or (2) due to causes that would entitle the Owner to recover delay costs or
damages.
No extension of time or additional compensation, if applicable, will be granted for any delay
unless the claimed delay directly affects the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or the
schedule shown on the approved bar graph schedule, whichever is applicable, and any float has
been consumed. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the
Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed in Subsections 43(a)
or (b) above, whichever applies. Furthermore, no extension of time or additional compensation
shall be given for any delay unless a written request therefor is made in writing to the Owner, with
a copy to the Architect/Engineer, within twenty (20) days of the end of the delay. The request shall
state the cause of the delay, the number of days of extension requested, and any additional
compensation requested by the Contractor. Failure to give written notice of either the inception or
the termination of the cause of delay or failure to present a claim for extension of time and/or
monetary compensation within the times prescribed shall constitute a waiver of any claim for
extension or additional compensation based upon that cause.
Requests for extensions of time and/or compensation for delays pursuant to Subsection 43(b)
above must be substantiated by itemized data and records clearly showing that the Work delayed
was on the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or on the sequence of Work on the
approved bar graph schedule, as modified, whichever applies, and that the additional time and/or
costs incurred by the Contractor are directly attributable to the delay in the Work claimed.
Furthermore, compensation for delay shall be calculated from the contractual Time for
Completion or Contract Completion Date, as adjusted by Change Order, and shall not be
calculated based on any early completion planned or scheduled by the Contractor, unless a Change
Order has been executed pursuant to Section 19(f) changing the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date to reflect such early completion. See Section 19 for procedures for the
Contractor to follow if he plans early completion of the Work and wishes to request a Change
Order reflecting the early completion date.
Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Owner Delay:
If and to the extent that the Contractor is entitled to an extension in the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date and additional compensation purely as a result of delay under
Subsection 43(b) and not as a result of a change in the Work under Section 38, the agreed
46
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
compensation and liquidated damages due the Contractor for days added to the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date for each day of such delay shall be the per diem
expenses as determined from an itemized accounting of the direct Site overhead expenses and
home office and other indirect overhead expenses only as specified in Subsections 38(e)(6)(i) and
(ii). These expenses shall exclude any and all expenses specified in Subsection 38(f).
(f)
If the Contractor submits a claim for delay damages pursuant to Subsection 43(b) above, the
Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for a percentage of all costs incurred by the Owner in
investigating, analyzing, negotiating, and litigating or arbitrating the claim, which percentage shall
be equal to the percentage of the Contractor's total delay claim which is determined through
litigation or arbitration to be false or to have no basis in law or in fact. (§ 2.2-4335, Code of
Virginia)
(g)
Any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be
accomplished only by issuance of a Change Order.
(h)
Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Contractor Delay: If the Contractor fails to
complete the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, the
Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the amounts set forth in the Supplemental General
Conditions, if any, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages for delay until
the Work is substantially or finally completed as the case may be. If liquidated damages are not so
fixed in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall be liable for any and all actual
damages sustained as a result of delay. In addition to damages for delay, whether liquidated or
actual, the Contractor shall also be liable for any and all actual damages sustained by the Owner as
a result of any other breach of the Contract, including, but not limited to, Defective Work and
abandonment of the Contract.
(i)
If liquidated damages are provided by the Supplemental General Conditions, the following
provisions apply:
(j)
44.
(1)
If the Work is not substantially complete by the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step One
liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions for Step One
liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Substantial
Completion.
(2)
Once the Work is substantially complete, the accrual of Step One liquidated damages
shall cease and the Contractor shall have thirty (30) calendar days in which to achieve
Final Completion of the Work.
(3)
If Final Completion of the Work is not achieved on or before the thirtieth (30th) calendar
day after Substantial Completion, and if the Owner has not granted any extension of time,
the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step Two liquidated
damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as Step Two liquidated
damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Final Completion.
The Contractor waives any and all defenses as to the validity of any liquidated damage provisions
in the General Conditions or other Contract Documents, or of any liquidated damages assessed
against the Contractor, on the grounds that such damages are void as penalties or are not
reasonably related to actual damages.
INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION
(a)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial
Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2a), of the date when the Work or designated portion
47
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
thereof, will be, in his opinion, substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing to
determine if it has reached Substantial Completion. The notice shall be given at least ten (10) days
in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his
written endorsement as to whether or not he concurs with the Contractor's statement that the Work
will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. The Architect/Engineer's endorsement is
a convenience to the Owner only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the
matter nor shall the Architect/Engineer's endorsement be deemed to be evidence that the Work
was substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing. Inspection and testing shall take
place at a time(s) mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer.
The inspection shall include a demonstration by the Contractor that all equipment, systems and
operable components of the project function properly and in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall furnish access for the inspection and testing as provided in
Section 21 of these General Conditions. The inspection and testing shall determine whether
Substantial Completion has been accomplished and shall result in a written list of unfinished Work
and Defective Work, commonly referred to as a "punch list", which must be finished and corrected
to obtain Final Completion.
After successful completion of the testing and the Architect / Engineer determines that, in its
opinion, the Work, either in whole or in part, is substantially complete, the Architect / Engineer
shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the
Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1a), that the Work, or a specified portion thereof, is
recommended to be declared substantially complete. The Owner shall notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the date the Owner accepts the Work, or the specified portion thereof, as substantially
complete or the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the deficiencies to be corrected or completed
before such Work will be accepted as substantially complete.
45.
(b)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Completion by the
Contractor (form CO-13.2), of the date when the Work has reached or will reach Final Completion
and will be ready for final inspection and testing. The notice shall be given at least five (5) days in
advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his
endorsement as to whether or not he concurs in the Contractor's statement that the Work will be
ready for inspection and testing on the date given. That inspection and any necessary testing shall
be conducted in the same manner as the inspection for Substantial Completion. When the Work is
finally and totally complete, including the elimination of all defects, the Work shall be finally
accepted by the Owner and Final Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 36 of these
General Conditions.
(c)
The Architect/Engineer shall conduct the inspections. The Owner may elect to have other persons
of its choosing also participate in the inspections. If one or more Substantial or Final Completion
re-inspections are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs of re-inspection
or, at the Owner's option, the costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.
(d)
A representative of the State Fire Marshal's Office will either be present at the Substantial and
Final Completion inspections or otherwise inspect the completed Work and advise the Owner
whether the Work meets the fire safety requirements of the applicable building code.
(e)
Approval of Work at or as a result of any inspection required herein shall not release the
Contractor or his surety from responsibility for complying with the Contract.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
(a)
Except as otherwise specified, all Work shall be, and is hereby, guaranteed by the Contractor
against defects resulting from the use of materials, equipment or workmanship, which are
defective, inferior, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, for one (1) year from the
48
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
date of Final Completion of the entire Project by the Owner. Equipment and facilities which have
seasonal limitations on their operation (e.g. heating or air conditioning units) shall be guaranteed
for one (1) full year from the date of seasonally appropriate tests and acceptance, in writing, by the
Owner. Where the Owner agrees to take Beneficial Occupancy of a portion or phase of the Work
which has been determined to be substantially complete before the entire Work is finally
completed, the guarantees for the materials, equipment and workmanship in that portion or phase
shall begin on the date that the Owner takes Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in
the Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, or by separate agreement. At six (6)
months and eleven (11) months after substantial completion, the Contractor shall meet with the
Owner to review the status of and assign value to any unresolved warranty, guarantee, and punch
list items.
(b)
If, within any guarantee period, Work which is not in accordance with the Contract, Defective
Work, or inferior material, equipment or workmanship is noted by the Owner or
Architect/Engineer which requires or renders necessary repairs or changes in connection with the
guaranteed Work, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, such
notice being given not later than two weeks after the guarantee period expires, and without
expense to the Owner:
(1)
Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed Work and correct
all defects, inferior materials, equipment or workmanship therein;
(2)
Make good all damage to the structure or Site or equipment or contents thereof, which, in
the opinion of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, is the result of the use of materials,
equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the
terms of the Contract; and
(3)
Make good any Work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures and/or Site
disturbance that results from fulfilling the provisions of this Section.
(c)
In any case, when in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract and this guarantee or any other
guaranty or warranty, the Contractor disturbs any work performed by a separate contractor, he
shall restore such work to a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner and
guarantee such restored work to the same extent as if it was guaranteed under this Contract.
(d)
If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee
as set forth in this Section, the Owner may have the defects or inferior materials, equipment or
workmanship corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred.
(e)
All special warranties and guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be
stipulated in or required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Section
during the first year of the life of such special warranty or guarantee.
(f)
The guarantee of this Section shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other warranties, express
or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law.
(g)
Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect
to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including
liability for Defective Work under Section 30. This Section relates only to the specific obligation
of the Contractor as set forth in this Section to correct the Work and does not limit the time within
which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor
the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with
respect to his other obligations under the Contract Documents.
49
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
46.
CO-7
(h)
In the event the Work of the Contractor is to be modified by another contractor, either before or
after the Final Inspection provided by Section 44 of the General Conditions, the first Contractor
shall remain responsible in all respects under this Section's Guarantee of Work and under any
other warranties or guarantees, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by
law. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defects in material or workmanship
introduced by the contractor modifying his Work. The first Contractor and the contractor making
the modifications shall each be solely responsible for his respective work. The contractor
modifying the earlier Work shall be responsible for any damage to or defect introduced into the
Work by his modification. If the first contractor claims that a subsequent contractor has introduced
defects of materials and/or workmanship into his Work, it shall be the burden of the contractor
making the claim to demonstrate clearly the nature and extent of such introduced defects and the
other contractor's responsibility for those defects. Any contractor modifying the work of another
shall have the same burden if he asserts that defects in his work were caused by the contractor
whose work he is modifying.
(i)
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Commonwealth of Virginia, the Owner and
the Owner’s consultants, representatives, agents and employees from and against any and all
claims, causes of action, losses, costs, expenses or damages, including but not limited to attorney's
fees, of any kind or nature whatsoever, arising from or relating to any bodily injury, including
sickness, disease or death, or any property damage, that result from or arise out of the work
performed by the Contractor, or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the Work,
through the use of unacceptable materials in the Work, or resulting from any act, omission,
negligence, or misconduct of the Contractor, any of his subcontractors, anyone directly or
indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. The Owner may retain
as much of the moneys due the Contractor under the Contract as the Owner considers necessary to
ensure that a fund will be available to pay a settlement or judgment of such suits, actions, or
claims. If insufficient monies are or will become due, the Contractor’s surety and/or insurers will
not be released from liability until all such claims and actions have been settled and suitable
evidence to that effect has been furnished the Owner.
ASSIGNMENTS
Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or any part without the written
consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him
hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Owner. Consent to assignment shall not be
unreasonably withheld. No assignment shall relieve any party from its obligations under the
Contract.
47.
CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§2.2-4363, Code of Virginia)
(a)
Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted, in writing, no later
than sixty (60) days after Final Payment; however, written notice of the Contractor's intention to
file such claim must be given within fourteen (14) days of the time of the occurrence or beginning
of the Work upon which the claim is based. Such notice shall state that it is a “notice of intent to
file a claim” and include a written statement describing the act or omission of the Owner or its
agents that allegedly caused or may cause damage to the Contractor and the nature of the claimed
damage. The submission of a timely notice is a prerequisite to recovery under this Section. Failure
to submit such notice of intent within the time and in the manner required shall be a conclusive
waiver of the claim by the Contractor. Oral notice, the Owner’s actual knowledge, or a written
notice given after the expiration of fourteen (14) days of time of the occurrence or beginning of
the Work upon which the claim is based, shall not be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this
Section. Although the Contractor may be required to submit certain classes of claims prior to Final
Payment, and the Contractor is not prevented from submitting claims during the pendency of the
Work, the Owner shall not be obligated to render a final written decision on any claim until after
50
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Final Payment. All claims shall state that they are “claims” pursuant to this Section, be submitted
along with all practically available supporting evidence and documentation and the certification
required by Subsection 47(f), and request a final decision. Certificates for payment, applications
for payment, vouchers, invoices and similar requests for payment submitted for work done by the
Contractor in accordance with the expected contract performance are routine submissions and
shall not be considered claims under this Section. Proposed or requested change orders, demands
for money compensation or other relief, and correspondence and e-mails to the Owner or its
representatives, which do not strictly comply with the requirements of this Section, shall not be
considered claims under this Section.
48.
(b)
No written decision denying a claim or addressing issues related to the claim shall be considered a
denial pursuant to this Section unless the written decision makes express reference to this Section
and is signed by the Agency head or his designee. The Contractor may not institute legal action
prior to receipt of the Owner's final written decision on the claim unless the Owner fails to render
such a decision within ninety (90) days of submission of the claim, at which time the claim shall
be deemed denied.
(c)
The decision of the agency head or other signatory on the Contract shall be final and conclusive
unless the Contractor within six (6) months of the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates
legal action as provided in § 2.2-4364 of the Code of Virginia. Failure of the Owner to render a
decision within 90 days shall not result in the Contractor being awarded the relief claimed nor
shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the Owner's failure to render a
decision within 90 days shall be the Contractor's right to immediately institute legal action. No
administrative appeals procedure pursuant to § 2.2-4365 of the Code of Virginia has been
established for contractual claims under this Contract.
(d)
Pursuant to § 2.2-4366, Alternative Dispute Resolution, of the Code of Virginia, the Owner may
enter into an agreement with the Contractor to submit disputes arising from the performance of
this Contract to arbitration and utilize mediation and other alternative dispute resolution
procedures. However, such procedures entered into by the Owner, the Commonwealth, or any
department, institution, division, commission, board or bureau thereof, shall be non-binding and
subject to § 2.2-514, as applicable.
(e)
In the event that a dispute, claim or controversy between the Owner and the Contractor arises
regarding the requirements of the Contract, the performance of the Work, payment due the
Contractor, the terms of any Change Order, or otherwise, the Contractor shall not stop, suspend or
delay the Work or any part of the Work to be performed under the Contract, or under any Change
Order, or as ordered by the Owner. The Contractor shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work to
completion, including work required in any Change Order or as directed by the Owner.
(f)
Along with a claim submitted under this Section, the Contractor shall submit a claim certification
form. Claims submitted without the certification form shall not constitute a proper claim and, if
not submitted with the certification within the time required, shall be deemed to be waived.
(g)
The remedies provided in these General Conditions, including costs, expenses, damages or
extensions of time, shall be the Contractor’s sole remedies for the acts, omissions or breaches of
the Owner, which shall survive termination or breach of the Contract.
ASBESTOS
(a)
This subsection applies to projects involving existing buildings where asbestos abatement is not a
part of the Work, when the scope of the project has been reviewed and a comprehensive survey
51
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
conducted by an individual licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational
Regulation to conduct building inspections for asbestos containing materials in buildings, and
where the Owner has attempted to remove or encapsulate all asbestos containing material that may
become friable or damaged during this Project.
Prior to commencement of Work, the results of the comprehensive survey or any other asbestos
survey shall be made available to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for performing his
Work so as not to disturb any remaining asbestos, encapsulated or otherwise, identified in such
survey or surveys.
If the Contractor discovers or inadvertently disturbs any material that he knows, should have
known or has reason to believe, may contain asbestos that has not been previously identified, was
overlooked during the removal, was deemed not to be friable or was encapsulated, the Contractor
shall stop Work in the area containing or suspected to contain the asbestos, secure the area, and
notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone or in person with written
notice as soon as possible. The Owner will have the suspect material sampled.
If the sample is positive and must be disturbed in the course of the Work, the Owner shall have the
material repaired or removed and shall pay for the bulk sample analysis.
Except as provided in §11-4.1 of the Code of Virginia, if the material disturbed is not within the
Contractor's authorized Work and/or Work area or under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay for
all associated sampling and abatement costs.
49.
50.
(b)
If asbestos abatement is included as a part of the Work, the Contractor shall assure that the
asbestos abatement work is accomplished by those duly licensed as described in Section 3 of these
General Conditions and in accordance with the specific requirements of the Contract and all
applicable laws and regulations.
(c)
If asbestos abatement is included as part of the Work, the licensed asbestos Subcontractor shall
obtain the insurance required under Section 11 (e) of these General Conditions.
TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
(a)
As a part of the Work, the Contractor in conjunction with his Subcontractors and Suppliers shall
provide the Owner's operations and maintenance personnel with adequate instruction and training
in the proper operation and maintenance of any equipment, systems, and related controls provided
or altered in the Work. The training requirements may be further defined in the specifications.
(b)
The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of two (2) copies of operating,
maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment and systems provided in the Work. Further
specific requirements may be indicated in the specifications.
PROJECT MEETINGS
(a)
The intention of this Section is that the Contractor, the Owner and the A/E have timely exchange
of information and cooperate to accomplish the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for managing the Work, obtaining approvals and requesting
clarifications on a timely, reasonable basis. The Owner and its A/E are responsible for making a
reasonable effort to provide timely responses to the Contractor.
(b)
Preconstruction Meeting:
52
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Prior to the start of construction and no later than 15 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, a
"Preconstruction" meeting shall be held with attendees to include the Owner's Project Manager
and Project Inspector, the Architect/Engineer's project manager and representatives of each design
discipline involved in the Project, the Regional Fire Marshal, the Contractor's project manager and
superintendent (and scheduler, if Contractor desires), and representatives of the Contractor's major
Subcontractors. The purpose of the meeting is to clarify and discuss the specifics related to, but
not limited to, the following:
(c)
(1)
Persons involved from each entity and their chain of authority including the names of
persons authorized to sign Change Orders and any limits to their authority. Name of
Contractor’s on-site certified Responsible Land Disturber.
(2)
Names, addresses, telephone numbers and FAX numbers to be used for Requests for
Information (RFI), Requests for Clarification (RFC), Requests for Proposals (RFP), shop
drawings, Submittals, and notices.
(3)
Contractor's proposed construction schedule and Owner's sequencing requirements, if
any.
(4)
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) requirements and
procedures.
(5)
Procedures for shop drawings, product data and Submittals.
(6)
Procedures for handling Field Orders and Change Order Form CO-11.
(7)
Procedures for Contractor's request for time extension, if any.
(8)
Construction Site requirements, procedures and clarifications to include:
- Manner of conducting the Work
- Site specialties such as dust and erosion control, stormwater management, project
signs, clean up and housekeeping, temporary facilities, utilities, security, and traffic
- Safety
- Layout of the Work
- Quality control, testing, inspections, and notices required
Site visits by the A/E and others
- Owner's Project Inspector duties
- Running Punch List
- As-Built Drawings
(9)
Procedures and documentation of differing or unforeseen Site conditions
(10)
Monthly Pay Meeting
(11)
Assignment of responsibility for generation of meeting minutes of all project meetings.
(12)
Project Close-Out requirements and procedures
(13)
Project records
Monthly Pay Meeting:
Section 36 establishes the requirement for a monthly pay meeting which will usually be held at or
near the Site. In addition to Owner, A/E and Contractor representatives, the following
53
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
representatives, at a minimum, should be available to attend portions of the meeting, as applicable
or necessary:
-
Owner's Project Inspector
Contractor's project superintendent
A/E representative of each discipline where Work was performed for the current pay
request or where Work is projected to be performed in the coming month.
A representative of each subcontractor who performed work included in the current
pay request.
A representative of each subcontractor who is projected to perform work in the
coming month.
The following topics should be included, as a minimum, in the monthly pay meeting:
(d)
(1)
Observations of status, quality and workmanship of Work in progress
(2)
Validation of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for payment
(3)
Conformance with proposed construction schedule
(4)
Outstanding Requests for Information, Requests for Clarification and Requests for
Proposal
(5)
Submittals with action pending
(6)
Status of pending Change Orders
(7)
Status of Running Punch List items
(8)
Work proposed for coming pay period
(9)
Discussions of any problems or potential problems which need attention
Other Meetings:
Requirements for other meetings, such as progress meetings, coordination meetings, preinstallation meetings and/or partnering meetings, may be included in the Contract Documents.
51.
SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM) BUSINESS
PROCUREMENT PLAN
The Owner has developed a “SWAM” plan for increasing procurement from small, womenowned, and minority-owned (SWAM) businesses in its construction program. The Owner’s
SWAM aspirational goals and plan are included in the contract documents for use by the
Contractor in developing its plan for involving small, women-owned, and minority-owned
(SWAM) businesses through subcontracting, and through the purchasing of goods, materials,
supplies and services in the Contractor’s construction program. The Owner’s plan provides
criteria and goals for the Contractor in developing a plan, for submitting its plan and for reporting
its achievements in meeting the goals established for the Contract.
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the posting of the Notice of Intent to Award but
not later than 30 days after the effective date of the contract, provide a list of Subcontractors that
are proposed to perform the work, including SWAM subcontractors, vendors and suppliers
showing their DMBE certification numbers where applicable. Upon receipt of the list, the Owner
54
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
may, based on the Agency SWAM Procurement Plan require the Contractor to provide additional
information on work that has been bid by SWAM contractors, and areas in which the scope of
work may be reduced in size to increase the pool of potential SWAM contractors. Selection of
particular Subcontractors for a certain part of the work shall be made in accord with Section 9,
Subcontracts of the General Conditions.
***ENDOFGENERALCONDITIONS***
55
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00850
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS
A.
The following documents are not printed in this Project Manual but are included by reference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Instructions to Bidders (HECO-7a), dated 2/7/12.
Contract between University and Contractor (HECO-9), dated 05/08/13.
Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10), dated 10/27/09.
Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (HECO-10.1), dated 2/27/14.
Contract Change Order (HECO-11) and Change Order Justification (HECO 11a), both
dated 8/31/12.
General Contractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-GC-1), dated 10/03/13.
Subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-SC-1), dated 10/03/13.
Sub-subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-SS-1), dated 10/03/13.
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (HECO-12), dated 12/6/10.
The following documents immediately follow this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Affidavit of Payment of Claims (CO-13), dated 2/01.
Final Report of Structural and Special Inspections (HECO 13.1b), dated 3/18/09.
Certificate of Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2), dated 7/21/09.
Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2a), dated
2/23/09.
PART 2 - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00850 - 1
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00850 - 2
DGS-30-108
CO-13
(Rev. 02/01)
Page 1 of 1
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS
By:
This day
personally appeared before me,
, a Notary Public in and for the City
(County) of
,
and, being by me
first duly sworn, states that all subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials have been paid all sums
due them for work performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Contract between the
Commonwealth of Virginia, _____________________________________________________________
______________, Owner, and______________________________________________ , Contractor,
dated
,20
, for the construction of
or arrangements have been made by the Contractor satisfactory to such subcontractors and suppliers with
respect to payments of such sums as may be due them by the Contractor.
Typed Contractor Name
By:
Signature
Typed Name &Title of Person Signing
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
expires on the
day of
day of
, 20
, 20
.
Notary Public
. My commission
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HECO-13.1b (3/18/09)
Page 1 of 1
HECO 13.1b
FINAL REPORT OF STRUCTURAL & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
Finance & Budget (for closeout & scanning)
University of Virginia
575 Alderman Road / P.O. Box 400726
Charlottesville, VA 22904-4726
Ref:
PROJECT TITLE:
Project Code: ; PIMS #
A/E of Record:
; Work Order #
To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Structural & Special Inspections required
for this Project, and itemized in the HECO-6b, Special Inspections listing attached to the HECO-6a,
Statement of Structural and Special Inspections, submitted for permit, have been completed.
The discrepancies noted and the resolution/disposition of each are noted on the attached pages 1 thru
.
Respectfully submitted,
Structural Engineer of Record
Project Inspector
by:____________________
(Signature) (date)
by: ____________________
(Signature) (date)
Name:
Name:
Title:
Title:
University Project Manager
by: ____________________
(Signature)
(date)
Name:
Title:
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HECO-13.2 (7/21/09)
Page 1 of 1
HECO-13.2
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
Date
Facilities Planning & Construction
P.O. Box 400726
Charlottesville, Virginia 22904-4726
PROJECT TITLE:
Project Code:
; Work Order #
; PIMS #
In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between the University and the Contractor, the undersigned
hereby states that the above named Project has reached Final Completion in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents, as modified by any approved Change Order(s), on date:
All applicable tests, certificates, and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building
Code (VUSBC) and the Contract Documents have been performed and the University has been provided with a
copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints required by the Contract Documents have been provided to the A/E.
The University has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including their starting date(s),
written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents.
All training, operating instructions, and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been
provided to the University.
Contractor: _________________________
By: _______________________________
(Signature)
(date)
Name: _____________________________
Title: ________________________________
Address: _____________________________
___________________________
___________________________
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HECO-13.2a (2/23/09)
Page 1 of 2
HECO-13.2a
CERTIFICATE OF PARTIAL OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION BY
CONTRACTOR
Date
Facilities Planning & Construction
P.O. Box 400726
Charlottesville, Virginia 22904-4726
PROJECT TITLE:
Project Code:
; Work Order #
; PIMS #
In accordance with the requirements of the Agreement Between the University and the Contractor, the
undersigned Contractor hereby states that portions of the above are Substantially Complete in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, as modified by any approved Change Order(s.) Those portions of the
Project now Substantially Complete are:
.
All applicable tests, certificates, and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building
Code (VUSBC) and the Contract Documents have been performed with respect to the Substantially Complete
portions of the Project and the University has been provided with a copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints of the Substantially Complete portions of the Project have been provided to the A/E as
required by the Contract Documents.
The University has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of all
warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents with respect to the
Substantially Complete portions of the Project, except as follows:
.
All training, operating instructions, and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been
provided to the University, except as follows:
.
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents
nor is it a release of Contractor’s obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor _________________________
by: _______________________________
(Signature)
(date)
HECO-13.2a (2/23/09)
Page 2 of 2
Name: _____________________________
Title: ________________________________
Address: _____________________________
___________________________
___________________________
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this certificate:
List of unfinished and defective Work, pages 1 thru
.
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 00851
DRAWING INDEX
SHEET NUMBER / SHEET NAME
COVER
T
COVER SHEET AND INDEX
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
A0.02
A2.01
A3.00
A3.10
A3.20
PROJECT INFORMATION
DEMOLITION PLAN, FLOOR PLAN & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
PARTITION TYPES & DETAILS
INTERIOR DESIGN SELECTIONS & FINISH INFORMATION
DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
MECHANICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS
PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - MECHANICAL
PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS
FP1
FP2
PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - FIRE PROTECTION
PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - FIRE PROTECTION
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
E1
E2
E3
E4
ELECTRICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL AND NEW WORK - ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00851 - 1
DRAWING INDEX
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
00851 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01000
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
This Division 01 shall be used with the General Conditions (HECO-7/CO-7; HECO-7CM; and
HECO-7DB/CO-7DB), Supplemental General Conditions, and the other Contract Documents.
The term "University" is synonymous with "Owner."
UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVES
A.
The University may assign a Construction Administration Manager (CAM). The duties of the
CAM are: to assist the University's Project Manager (PM) as the University’s on-site
representative for the construction phase; to coordinate all construction phase Consultants; to
coordinate other Consultants, the A/E, and the Construction Manager (CM) / General Contractor
(GC) communications; to expedite resolution of all conflicts; to perform additional quality
assurance oversight (such as inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection) and other
administrative oversight. The CAM shall be provided copies of all written decisions and notices
to the CM/GC and information and notices from the CM/GC. All activities not specifically
required to be performed by the A/E may be performed by the CAM or by the University’s other
Consultants.
B.
The University may also remove/reassign from the A/E to any selected Consultants certain
inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection, and administrative duties and authority. The
University shall provide the CM/GC and the A/E information in writing defining the limits of the
selected Consultants’ authority.
1.3
GOVERNING AUTHORITY AND APPLICABILITY OF PROVISIONS
A.
1.4
The CM/GC shall abide by all University regulations and amendments and all other applicable
laws and regulations of the Commonwealth, including those that may be issued during the
Contract.
This governing authority applies to all employees of the CM/GC and all
Trade/Subcontractors. In particular, regulations pertaining to sexual harassment, drug and
alcohol use, abusive and offensive language, and smoking should be noted.
RESUMES FOR CM/GC’S PERSONNEL
A.
The CM/GC shall submit to the University, at least one week prior to the Preconstruction
Meeting, a resume for each principal staff member who will work on the project, including PM,
Superintendent, Foreman, and Quality Control Representative.
B.
Resumes shall include, at a minimum, educational background, length of time with the
company, and past work experience, with an outline of responsible positions held.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01000 - 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
C.
1.5
The University reserves the right to interview and to reject any staff member for specific reasons
and request new resume submissions.
SWAM FIRM UTILIZATION
A.
It is the policy of the University to contribute to the establishment, preservation, and
strengthening of SWaM firms and to encourage their participation in University procurement
activities. Towards that end, the University encourages CMs/GCs to provide for the
participation of SWaM firms through partnerships, joint ventures, subcontracts, and other
contractual opportunities. The University has a SWaM firm overall participation goal of 40% for
procurement opportunities. Where it is practicable for any portion of awarded contracts to be
subcontracted to other firms, the University encourages the use of SWaM firms.
B.
Names of SWaM firms currently registered with and certified by the Virginia Department of
Minority Business Enterprises (DMBE) and desiring to work at the University may be obtained
from the Office of Supplier Diversity in the University Department of Procurement Services. See
http://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagediversity for additional information.
C.
If the total amount of a contract with the University exceeds $100,000, Contractors shall
complete and submit quarterly reports, on forms provided by the Office of Supplier Diversity in
accordance with the University’s SWaM plan, to document Trade/Subcontractor and Supplier
expenditures to SWaM firms in connection with the project. The successful firm shall provide
the UVA SWaM Contract Administrator with the name of the responsible person within their
organization who will be the SWaM contact and who will be responsible for reporting verifiable
SWaM expenditures resulting from this contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01000 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK COVERED UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Name of Project: UVA UH Level 1 Radiology – I.R. Equipment Replacement Angio Room
1064/#15.
B.
University: The Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of
Virginia (collectively referred to as the University or Owner).
C.
Architect of Record: HKS, Inc.
1.2
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A.
1.3
The University will furnish the products identified on the drawings. The work for this project
includes supplying the labor, material, coordination, and supervision to install these products as
per the Contract Documents and General Conditions.
ASSIGNED WORK
A.
1.4
No assigned work required.
CONCURRENT UNIVERSITY OCCUPANCY
A.
Continued Occupancy - Adjacent Areas:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
The remainder of the facility will be occupied by UVA personnel during entire construction
period for conduct of normal operations.
CM/GC shall cooperate with University in scheduling operations to minimize conflict.
Perform work so as not to interfere with operations of occupied areas.
See 01010.1.6D for smoking restriction.
CM/GC USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A.
Access to Site: Limited, to be reviewed with project manager.
B.
Emergency Building Exits: Maintain existing emergency exits during construction.
C.
If Construction Operations: Limited to areas shown on Drawings.
D.
Time Restrictions for Performing Work: 7AM-6PM, Monday through Friday. Work outside these
times shall not be construed as constituting additional cost to University. Work hours in the
vicinity of occupied patient sleeping areas is restricted to 8AM-6PM all days. No deliveries shall
occur between 7AM-8:30AM and 4PM-5:30PM.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01010 - 1
SUMMARY OF WORK
E.
Night Work Hours: Defined as between 6PM and 7AM, Monday though Friday. Request
permission in writing at least five (5) days in advance for work at these times. Work at these
times must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these
times shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not incur additional cost to University.
F.
Weekend Work Hours: Defined as between 6PM Friday and 7AM Monday.
Request
permission in writing at least 5 days in advance for work at these times. Work at these times
must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these times
shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not incur additional cost to University.
G.
The CM/GC shall schedule the remodel work within the existing building to avoid interference
with occupied areas. Submit schedule and summary of applicable Work within occupied areas
and obtain University approval not less than seven (7) days prior to commencement of such
work.
H.
The CM/GC shall coordinate access to and security of existing mechanical/electrical equipment
spaces with the University.
I.
Staging Areas: Coordinate with University Project Manager.
1.6
OPERATIONS OUTSIDE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS
A.
Use of certain passageways and other areas, outside of defined limits of operation will be
granted on intermittent basis as required and requested in advance (7 days minimum).
B.
The CM/GC shall comply with designated travel paths, staging areas, dumpster locations, and
other restricted items indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Dining: Only University dining facilities open to the public will be available for CM/GC use.
D.
Occupied University buildings and grounds, including the construction limits, are a non-smoking
environment. Smoking is allowed only in designated areas. For Health System projects, see
http://www.healthsystem.virginia.edu/internet/environment/media/SmokingMap.pdf
for
prohibited smoking areas.
1.7
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
1.8
Construct Work in stages to accommodate University’s occupancy requirements during the
construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with the University.
UTILITY OUTAGES
A.
Authority to schedule power outages must be obtained from the University. The University will
coordinate the interruption of service with the CM/GC and all University parties affected.
B.
In all cases the CM/GC shall keep utility and service outages to minimum and only after written
approval of University is received.
C.
CM/GC requests for outages shall include an identification of areas that will be affected by
proposed outage.
D.
The CM/GC shall make requests a minimum of 5 working days (preferred 10 days for extensive
outages in advance of proposed outage.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01010 - 2
SUMMARY OF WORK
E.
All existing fire protection equipment and fire alarm system shall remain operational during
construction. If temporary shutdown is necessary, system shall be returned to operational
condition as soon as possible and no later than the end of each working day prior to the CM/GC
leaving the site. CM/GC is to notify the University Fire Marshal prior to any necessary
shutdowns. Shutdown shall not affect other areas not involved with this construction project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01010 - 3
SUMMARY OF WORK
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01010 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01015
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS AND CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECURITY AND PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Employees of CM/GC and Trade CM/GCs are required to wear University approved numbered
identification badges on outer garments above elbow level while on University premises.
B.
CM/GC or Trade CM/GC personnel not complying with this requirement will be denied access to
University or will be escorted off premises by University security personnel.
C.
The CM/GC is required to provide the University a complete list of workers that will be on the
job site five working days prior to the start of work. Any changes in site personnel must be
reported to the University in writing immediately. Include on list names and badge numbers for
each worker on site.
1.2
BURNING AND WELDING OPERATIONS
A.
1.3
The CM/GC shall provide the University 5 working days advance notice for all burning and
welding operations.
HOT WORKS OPERATIONS
A.
1.4
The CM/GC shall follow all University and VOSHA standards/regulations on Hot Works
operations and is subject to VOSHA inspections. CM/GCs certify that they have a Hot Works
program in place with proper oversight that includes recognition of the risk of after-hours ignition
from Hot Work and the requirement for a fire watch.
SAFETY PROCEDURES
A.
1.5
Area of Work is subject to Interim Life Safety Measures as per JCAHO requirements.
WORK SITE PROTECTION
A.
The CM/GC shall provide padding at corridor walls when there is a possibility of damage.
B.
The CM/GC shall provide minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard protection at carpeted areas when
they will be subject to heavy rolling loads.
C.
The CM/GC shall prohibit traffic on lawn and landscaped areas.
1.6
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
A.
Use of cellphones and pagers is strictly prohibited in all Health System buildings.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01015 - 1
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
1.7
BLASTING
A.
Blasting is strictly prohibited on the University grounds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01015 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01027
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS - INVOICING
A.
Unless otherwise directed by the University representative, please deliver one completed copy
of your HECO-12, Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (invoice) to the University
PM or CAM. They are responsible for delivering the approved invoice to the Facilities
Management Fiscal Technician, (575 Alderman Rd, Charlottesville, VA, P.O. Box 400726,
Charlottesville, VA 22904-4726). A computer-generated replica of the form is acceptable;
however, signatures must be original. Incorrect and/or nonconforming invoices may need to be
returned for correction, thus delaying payment.
B.
Include all of the following information on the Schedule of Values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Project Title:
UVA UH Level 1 Radiology –
I.R. Equipment Replacement Angio Room 1064/#15
Project Code No: N/A
UVA FP&C PIMS # P02989
UVA Purchase Order # __________*
UVA Work Order # 1414669
PIMS Acct Code # P02989
(Your) Federal Identification (FEIN) # __________
(*This information is located on the formal Notice to Proceed and may also be
obtained from or confirmed from the Contract Administrator for Construction, 434
982-0258 or Senior Fiscal Technician, 434 982-5856.)
1.2
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of CM/GC's Construction
Schedule.
1.
2.
B.
Correlate line items with other required administrative forms and schedules, including
Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment. Provide several line items for principal
subcontract amounts. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the
Contract Sum.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 1
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
2.
3.
Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment
may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet
installed.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
4.
1.3
Temporary facilities and other items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may
be shown either as separate line items or distributed as general overhead
expense.
Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment
when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by University.
1.
2.
3.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between University and CM/GC. The period of construction Work covered by
each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement or established at
the preconstruction conference.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of CM/GC. Architect will return
incomplete applications without action.
a.
b.
4.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and CM/GC's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
before last day of construction period covered by application.
Affidavit of Payment: With each Application for Payment, submit CO-13 “Affidavit of
Payment of Claims” form from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien
arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for
retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full affidavit.
University reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit affidavit.
Delays:
Submit each Application for Payment with CM/GC's affidavit for
construction period covered by the application.
1)
e.
Submit final Application for Payment with or proceeded by affidavit from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the
application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
Forms: Submit affidavit on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to University.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 2
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
5.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
6.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
a.
b.
7.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete
and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for University occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and
supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not
limited, to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.4
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
CM/GC's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of CM/GC's staff assignments.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
Universitys HECO-13.2 “Certificate of Completion by CM/GC” form.
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data
as of date of Substantial Completion or when University took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS - CHANGES
A.
CM/GC's itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed
change in Contract Price shall be provided on relevant University forms as indicated in Division
00 Section "Additional Documents".
B.
CM/GC shall participate as a member of the Board on Changes for all changes valued over
$250,000. The University will appoint the members of each Board on Changes which will
include but not be limited to the CM/GC, the A/E, the University Construction Program Manager,
PM and CAM.
C.
Minor Changes in the Work: Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor
Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on
Architects standard form.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 3
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
D.
University-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to
stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request and after receipt of Proposal Request, submit
a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated CM/GC's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
CM/GC-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, CM/GC may propose changes by submitting a request for a change.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Include an updated CM/GC's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified.
F.
Proposal Request Form: UVA standard form will be used for Proposal Requests.
G.
Allowance Adjustment: Base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase
amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. Allow for cutting
losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1.
2.
3.
Include installation costs only where indicated as part of the allowance.
Prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs
and other margins claimed.
Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances. University reserves the right to establish the quantity of
work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 4
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
H.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in the allowance described in the
Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or CM/GC's handling, labor,
installation, overhead, and profit.
1.
2.
Do not include CM/GC's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been
foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
No change to CM/GC's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
I.
Change Order Procedures: On University's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue
a Change Order for signatures of University and CM/GC on Architect’s standard form.
J.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
Architect’s standard form. Construction Change Directive instructs CM/GC to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
2.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required
by the Construction Change Directive.
a.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 5
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01027 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01039
PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination:
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other CM/GCs to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other CM/GCs to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports,
and list of attendees at meetings.
Preparation of CM/GC's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation meetings.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01039 - 1
PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings:
Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
1.4
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
Facilities Planning and Construction will schedule a preconstruction meeting before starting
construction, at a University location convenient to University, CM/GC, and Architect, no later
than 15 days after date of “Notice to Proceed”.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Attendees: Authorized representatives of University, Architect, and their consultants;
CM/GC and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. All participants at the meeting shall be
familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of the Work.
The preconstruction meeting, required by the General Conditions, will be scheduled by
the University. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Conduct a preinstallation meeting at Project site before each construction activity that requires
coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration.
Record significant meeting discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
Do not proceed with installation if the meeting cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and
reconvene the meeting at earliest feasible date.
CM/GC to schedule preinstallation meetings for all HVAC systems/components and any
other systems as required by the Project Specifications. Such meetings should include
the Architect, the project engineer for the discipline, the CAM, the Inspector, a University
facility operator, any commissioning consultant, the CM/GC’s PM and Superintendent,
the Mechanical Trade CM/GC’s PM and Superintendent, and a representative of the
major Supplier/Manufacturer.
CM/GC to require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the
specific section.
CM/GC to notify Architect and University at least four working days in advance of meeting
date.
CM/GC to prepare agenda and summary to facilitate:
1.
2.
Review of all required submittal approvals.
Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01039 - 2
PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
3.
4.
B.
1.6
Review coordination with related work.
Review of all required tests and reports.
CM/GC to record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants,
with copies to those affected by decisions made.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
CM/GC to schedule progress meetings throughout progress of the Work at regular intervals,
minimum of two per month. The monthly pay meeting, required by the General Conditions, may
serve as a progress meeting. Coordinate scheduled meeting dates with University and
Architect.
B.
CM/GC to provide a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting
and report on projected work for the next two weeks.
C.
Attendance Required:
Job Superintendent, major Trade CM/GCs and Suppliers,
representatives of the University and the Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each
meeting.
D.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to the status of the Project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Schedule.
Issues.
Requests for Information.
Requests for proposal.
Estimated Change Orders.
Change Orders.
Submittals.
Applications for Payment.
Safety, Security and Conduct.
University coordination.
E.
Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to participants.
F.
The Architect will preside at all progress meetings
1.7
MONTHLY PAY MEETING
A.
The monthly pay meeting, required by the General Conditions, will be scheduled by the
Architect. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01039 - 3
PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01039 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01230
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
1.3
Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for accepted alternates and the following,
as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of
the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be
necessary to accommodate accepted alternates.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from
ICC-ES.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using accepted alternates with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified
product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include
letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase
order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including change in the Contract Sum.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01230 - 1
ALTERNATES
B.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
C.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
D.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
E.
Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
F.
Acceptance of Alternates will be exercised at option of Owner in any order or combination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternates Listing: Refer to the drawings.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01230 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
(Reference General Conditions §24.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.2
See HECOM Definitions §2.2.
SUBMITTAL LOG
A.
CM/GC
shall
use
either
the
Submittal
Register
at
http://dgs.state.va.us/tabid/820/Default.aspx?udt_1673_param_detail=274 or one of its own
making acceptable to the University.
B.
CM/GC shall maintain in field office a copy of submittal schedule and log of submittals indicating
current status of each item.
C.
CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for review of
submittals. Except for special submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed
shop drawings, submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 10 working days.
D.
Schedule finish sample Submittals for approval of color, texture, graining, or other finish at least
30 days before purchase, assembly, or fabrication.
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
CM/GC shall bind in complete sets. Transmit reproducible transparencies in roll form to
eliminate folding. Folding of prints is acceptable.
B.
CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for review of shop
drawings. Except for special submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed
shop drawings, submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 10 working days. Allow
additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals. Architect will advise CM/GC when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
C.
CM/GC shall present in clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with Project name and
number, identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail schedule, or
room number of Contract Documents.
D.
CM/GC shall show detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, methods of assembly attachments,
relation to adjoining work, and other pertinent data and information.
E.
CM/GC shall verify dimensions and field conditions. Clearly indicate field dimensions and field
conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 1
SUBMITTALS
F.
CM/GC shall not use Contract Drawings for shop drawings. Provide original shop drawings with
changes from Contract Drawings clearly indicated.
G.
Distribution
1.
2.
3.
H.
Definitions:
1.
2.
I.
Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings, product data, samples, and
other submittals which bear A/E's stamp of approval to the Project record documents file,
the Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, other affected CM/GCs, and other entities
requiring information.
Provide each testing and inspection agency one set of approved submittals for their
exclusive use in providing specified quality control testing and inspection services; refer
to Division 01 Section "Quality Control and Quality Assurance".
The University is to receive two copies of all approved submittals, shop drawings and
product data.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive
action.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
J.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
K.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record
CM/GC's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of CM/GC.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 2
SUBMITTALS
j.
k.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
L.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
submittals.
M.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
N.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than CM/GC.
O.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product
or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Submit minimum of four copies of Product Data until final acceptance. Submit one
additional copy of Structural, Mechanical and Electrical items. Three copies of the
Product Data will be returned to the CM/GC after Architect's review.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.2
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on
reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Submit minimum of one reproducible and two prints of Shop Drawings until final
acceptance. Submit one additional print of Structural, Mechanical and Electrical items.
Reproducible and one print will be returned to the CM/GC after Architect's review.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 3
SUBMITTALS
2.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.3
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40
inches.
SAMPLES
A.
Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three full sets of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return two submittals with options selected.
Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain
one Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for
each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 4
SUBMITTALS
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality
Control and Quality Assurance."
CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and Universitys, and other information
specified.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that product complies with requirements.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this
specific Project.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements.
Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that material complies with requirements.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
with requirements.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either
during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed
by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in
effect for Project.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for
operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment.
Comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and
calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a
summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone
number of manufacturer.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 5
SUBMITTALS
19.
20.
Manufacturer's Field Reports:
Prepare written information documenting factoryauthorized service representative's tests and inspections.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond,
limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CM/GC'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return submittals without processing if they do not contain CM/GC’s stamp, if they
are not initialed or signed by authorized person, if they are not dated, or if it becomes evident
that they have not been properly reviewed. Delays resulting therefrom are the responsibility of
the CM/GC.
1.
2.
3.2
Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp.
Include statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
ACTION STAMP
A.
The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The
stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted," that
part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the
Architect's notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract
Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.
Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted" or "Revise
Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including
purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in
accordance with the Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to
obtain a different action mark.
Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, for
special processing or other CM/GC activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Not
Reviewed" or "Not Reviewed; submittal not required by Contract Documents".
Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Samples or Product Data which deviates from
the Contract Documents does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum. Submit in
writing at the time of submission any changes to the Contract Sum affected by such Shop
Drawings, Samples or Product Data, otherwise, claim for extras will not be considered.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 6
SUBMITTALS
3.3
PARTIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
3.4
Architect will not review partial or incomplete submittals. Complete submittals for each item are
required. Submittals will not be considered official until it is complete in every respect. Delays
resulting from partial submittals are the responsibility of the CM/GC.
RESUBMITTALS
A.
Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since
previous submittal.
B.
Architect will record time required to review resubmittals after original submittal and first
resubmittal. University retains the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse University for
charges to Architect and Architect's Consultants for reviewing submittal more than 2 times.
3.5
DISTRIBUTION
A.
Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings, product data, samples, and other
submittals which bear A/E's stamp of approval to the Project record documents file, the Project
site file, subcontractors, suppliers, other affected CM/GCs, and other entities requiring
information.
B.
Provide each testing and inspection agency one set of approved submittals for their exclusive
use in providing specified quality control testing and inspection services; refer to Division 01
Section "Quality Control and Quality Assurance".
C.
The University is to receive two copies of all approved submittals, shop drawings and product
data.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 7
SUBMITTALS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01300 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01312
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section specifies administrative procedures for preparation and submission of project
communications documents.
FORMAT
A.
Submit Letters, Memoranda, and Fax Communications in formats acceptable to the Architect.
B.
Submit E–Mail, Internet and Project Management Software Communications in forms and
formats acceptable to and approved by the Architect.
1.3
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORM AND LOG
A.
The CM/GC shall use the RFI form at the end of this section or use an alternate form
acceptable to the University.
B.
CM/GC shall carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with
fabrication and installation of Work. Promptly advise Architect of any error, inconsistency,
omission, or apparent discrepancy discovered.
C.
CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for handling queries
and clarifications.
D.
If Architect is able to respond to a request for information by making specific reference to
Drawing sheet or Specification Section, the University retains the right to require the CM/GC to
reimburse University for charges of Architect and Architects Consultants for performing review
services for the CM/GC.
E.
CM/GC shall maintain in field office a copy of the log of RFI’s indicating current status of each
item.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTS
A.
Letters, Memoranda, and Fax communications documents shall be submitted in a timely
manner so as to facilitate project delivery and coordination. Routing of communications shall be
as established in the Contract, the Contract Documents and the Pre-Construction Conference.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01312 - 1
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
Communications documents shall be transmitted or forwarded in a manner consistent with the
schedule and progress of the work.
B.
E–Mail Communications, Internet Communications, and Project Management Software
programs must be compatible with the Architect’s and University’s computer systems and
equipment. The responsibility for all costs for management of these systems, including, but not
limited to, licensing, on site training or other training necessary for the proper operation of such
systems, shall be by the CM/GC. The CM/GC shall keep written records and hard file copies of
all electronic communications. Failure of the CM/GC to keep such records shall waive the
CM/GC’s right to rely on such communications and such communications shall be deemed to
have not taken place.
C.
RFI (Request for Information – CM/GC) shall be defined and limited to a request from the
CM/GC seeking interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Such requests shall comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RFI requests shall be submitted in a timely manner, well in advance of related work, and
allow sufficient time for the resolution of issues relating to the request for interpretation or
clarification. CM/GC shall schedule the submission of RFI’s so as to moderate and
manage the flow of RFI requests. RFI’s shall be submitted in a manner consistent with
the schedule and progress of the work, and shall not be submitted in a sporadic and/or
excessive manner.
RFI requests shall be numbered in a sequential manner and contain a detailed
description of the areas of work requiring interpretation or clarification. Include drawing
and specification references, sketches, technical data, brochures, or other supporting
data as deemed necessary by the Architect, for the Architect to provide the
interpretations and clarifications requested. The CM/GC shall include a “Proposed
Solution” to the issue requiring interpretation or clarification.
RFI’s submitted to the CM/GC by Sub-Contractors, vendors, suppliers, or other parties to
the work shall be reviewed by the CM/GC prior to submission to the Architect. If the
Architect deems that such RFI requests have not been adequately reviewed by the
CM/GC, such requests will be returned to the CM/GC for further action. Sub-Contractor’s
RFI shall contain a “Proposed Solution”.
RFI requests shall not contain submittals, substitutions requests, routine
communications, correspondence, memos, claims, or any information required by other
areas of the Contract Documents. RFI requests containing such information will be
returned to the CM/GC without action by the Architect.
RFI requests are limited to a request for interpretation or clarification of the requirements
of the Contract Documents. Interpretations provided by the Architect shall not change
the requirements of the Contract or the Contract Documents. If the CM/GC determines
that the Architect’s response to an RFI gives cause for a change in the Contract or the
Contract Documents, the CM/GC shall promptly, within 5 working days, give written
notice to the Architect of request for adjustments. Requests for adjustments to the
Contract shall be submitted in a manner consistent with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
If the Architect, after review, determines that any RFI has been submitted in an
incomplete manner, is unnecessary, or does not otherwise comply with the requirements
of this Section, the RFI will be returned without action to the CM/GC. The CM/GC shall
delete the original submittal date from the RFI log and enter a new submittal date at the
time of re-submittal.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01312 - 2
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
D.
RFI (Request for Information – Architect) shall be defined as a request by the Architect for
information relating to the obligations of the CM/GC under the Contract.
1.
2.
After receipt of an RFI the CM/GC shall provide a written response to the Architect within
5 working days. Responses shall be thorough, complete and shall contain all information
requested by the Architect.
An RFI shall be limited to a request by the Architect for information related to the project.
The RFI shall not be construed as authorizing or directing a change in the Contract or the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01312 - 3
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01312 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
Date:
RFI No:
To: (Architect/Engineer)
From: (General Contractor)
Project Name:
UVA UH Level 1 Radiology –
I.R. Equipment Replacement Angio Room 1064/#15
Subject:
Spec Section:
Drawing No:
REQUEST:
The above request has been researched and is not answered by the contract
documents.
Name:
Title:
Signature:
RESPONSE:
Name:
Title:
cc: (University Manager)
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
Signature:
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B.
CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a
reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period.
C.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.
D.
Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
E.
Coordination:
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with
performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate CM/GCs.
Coordinate CM/GC's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity with other activities and schedule them in proper
sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Submittals Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by
dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
CM/GC's Construction Schedule.
Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of CM/GC's Construction Schedule.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01320 - 1
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
B.
CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Ganttchart-type, CM/GC's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of
Final Completion.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal
review times in CM/GC's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Constraints:
Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract
Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
a.
b.
c.
Work by University: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work
performed by University.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of limitations of continued
occupancies, uninterruptible services, use of premises restrictions, and provisions
for future construction.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work.
6.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,
including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final
Completion.
7.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed
change on the overall project schedule.
C.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording events at Project site,
including list of subcontractors; accidents; stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses; orders
and requests of authorities having jurisdiction; and equipment or system tests and startups.
D.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Include a detailed description of the
differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01320 - 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
CM/GC's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, University, separate
CM/GCs, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by CM/GC with a
need-to-know schedule responsibility.
a.
b.
B.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and
post in the same locations.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Photographer: CM/GC shall take electronic construction photographs at appropriate
times during the project.
Minimum Digital Camera Resolution: 1800 x 1200 dpi (dots per inch) @ 72 dpi
resolution.
Acceptable Electronic File Format: .jpg, .tif., .tiff., .tga., jpe., or .png.
Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is
being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project
site and surrounding properties from different vantage points. Show existing conditions
adjacent to property. Submit photos as required under “Submittals” Article.
Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff
date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage
points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were
taken. Submit photos as required under “Submittals” Article.
Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take photographs after date of Substantial
Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Submit photos as required
under “Submittals” Article.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01320 - 3
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01320 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01350
ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations is included in Division 02 Section
“Selective Demolition”.
B.
The following Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) as established by the Joint Commission on
Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO) shall be implemented, documented and
enforced in and adjacent to all construction areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Ensure that exits provide free and unobstructed egress. Personnel shall receive training, and
the Hospital shall be notified if alternative exits must be designated. Buildings/areas under
construction must maintain escape facilities for construction workers at all times. Means of
egress in construction areas must be inspected daily.
Ensure free and unobstructed access to emergency department/service and for emergency
forces.
Ensure that fire alarm, detection, and suppression systems are not impaired. A temporary,
but equivalent, system shall be provided, and the Hospital shall be notified, when any fire
system is impaired. Temporary systems must be inspected and tested monthly.
Ensure temporary construction partitions are smoke tight and built of non-combustible or
limited combustible materials that will not contribute to the development or spread of fire.
Provide additional fire-fighting equipment and use training for personnel.
Prohibit smoking in or adjacent to all construction areas.
Develop and enforce storage, housekeeping, and debris-removal practices that reduce the
flammable and combustible fire load of the building to lowest level necessary for daily
operations.
Conduct a minimum of two fire drills per shift per quarter.
Increase hazard surveillance of buildings, grounds, and equipment with special attention to
excavations, construction areas, construction storage, and field offices.
Train personnel, and notify the Hospital, when structural or compartmentation features of fire
safety are compromised.
Conduct organization wide safety education programs to assure awareness of and (LSC)
deficiencies, construction hazards, and these ILSM.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
New Materials: As specified in individual Sections.
B.
Match existing products and work for patching and extending work.
C.
Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and
workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work,
requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make Work
complete and consistent with existing quality.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01350 - 1
ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. Beginning of
restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace
and restore at completion.
C.
Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and
deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work.
D.
Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
E.
Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new
finishes.
F.
Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.
G.
Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage to existing finishes and to provide
means of restoring products and finishes to original or specified condition.
H.
Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for
each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. Install products as specified in
individual Sections.
I.
Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work
shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
J.
When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate
existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to
Architect.
K.
Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and
ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch
or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review.
L.
Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas.
M.
Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching”.
N.
Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing
other imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
O.
Finishes: Finish surfaces as specified in individual Sections. Finish patches to produce uniform
finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to
nearest intersections.
P.
Cleaning: In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures”, clean
University-occupied areas of work daily.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01350 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B.
Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports
performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not
include Contract enforcement activities performed by the A/E.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to fabrication and installation procedures.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
F.
Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and
tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and
installation procedures.
Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor’s
quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the A/E,
University, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Quality-control services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 1
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
10.
11.
12.
13.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
G.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
H.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
I.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
J.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
K.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
L.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
1.2
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
University testing and laboratory services: The University shall employ and pay for independent
testing and laboratory services, as specified in individual Specification Sections and as required
under Chapter 17 Structural Tests and Inspections of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide
Building Code, and required by the other governing authorities, except where they are
specifically indicated to be the Contractor’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified
entity.
B.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1.
2.
3.
The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform inspections,
tests, and similar quality control services which are designated in the technical
specifications as a Contractor requirement to provide.
Where the University has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and
inspection of a part of the Work and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity
for the same or related element; the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by
the University unless otherwise agreed in writing with the University.
Failure and Re-testing: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing or similar services, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-testing
where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and
do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
Removal and
replacement Work necessitated by such noncompliance shall be at the Contractor's
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 2
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
4.
expense. When inspections or tests cannot be performed after proper notification and at
the fault of the Contractor, rescheduling costs will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
Coordination: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection,
testing or similar services, the Contractor shall coordinate, with each agency engaged to
perform inspections, tests and similar services, the sequence of activities to
accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor shall
coordinate with each agency’s activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests. The Contractor is responsible for:
a.
b.
c.
5.
C.
Protection and Repair: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing or similar services, repair and protection are the Contractor’s
responsibility. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar
services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate
deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Protect
construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired
construction.
Contractor’s Quality Control: The Contractor shall have designated a single Quality Control
(QC) Representative, not the Job Superintendent or Job PM, responsible for the overall quality
of workmanship and compliance with specifications. The Contractor shall submit for approval a
resume for the Quality Control Representative in accordance with Section 01000 “Resumes for
Contractors Personnel”.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities.
Notifying the A/E and testing agency 48 hours in advance of operations requiring
testing services.
Providing incidental labor and facilities to facilitate inspections, tests, sample taking
and appropriate sample storage.
The QC Representative shall be responsible to observe and certify the performance of
contractor tests and pre-inspections identified on the Contractor’s Quality Control,
Required Certification Log – (Sample Attached). The QC Representative may elect to use
an alternate expert to observe / certify performance. The QC Representative shall be
qualified to monitor construction quality by experience and training.
The Contractor shall submit for approval a Quality Assurance Plan at the Preconstruction Meeting. The plan shall include identification and resumes of the Quality
Control Representative and any subordinate experts to the QC Representative. The plan
shall also address the QC Representative’s on site presence and participation in preinstallation, and Trade Contractor meetings. The plan shall include a proposed bi-weekly
Contractor’s Quality Control report. This report shall include results of contractor
certifications, University's test results, post installation inspection results, and updated
Contractor’s Quality Control, Required Certification Log.
The contractor shall use the Contractor’s Quality Control, Required Certification log as a
guide to track and plan for required certified pre- or post application inspections.
The QC Representative shall have the authority to stop work at any time quality problems
necessitate. This authority shall be delineated in a letter of appointment from a company
officer. The letter shall be included in the Quality Assurance Plan.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1.
Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 3
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.
3.
4.
5.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
F.
Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
G.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies where specified.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 4
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3
TEST AND INSPECTION CERTIFIED REPORTS
A.
For Contractor provided services, the Contractor shall forward a certified written report from the
independent agency of each inspection, test or similar service within one week of the test date
and with 4 copies, 2 copies for University and 2 copies for Architect. Written reports of each
inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.4
Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
Designation of the Work and test method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete inspection or test data.
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
Professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract
Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting.
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF SERVICE
A.
All Testing Service Agencies, engaging in inspection and testing services, including
independent testing laboratories, shall be prequalified as complying with “Recommended
Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification” by the American Council of
Independent Laboratories, and shall specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be
performed. Each Service Agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities
having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
B.
Additionally each laboratory shall:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740 and E329.
Maintain full-time registered engineer on staff to review and supervise services.
Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to
either National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or accepted values of
natural physical constants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 5
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
B.
CM/GC’s QC REQUIRED CERTIFICATION LOG – sample not all items may apply
Section
Paragraph
07141
3.1
07210
07270
07532
3.1
3.1
3.1
07901
08212
08462
3.2
3.3
3.1
3.1
3.1
0880
09300
09550
09660
09680
09950
11132
14100
16030
3.7B
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.1B
3.2C
3.2E
3.1
3.1B
3.1B
3.1B
3.2A
15210
15220
Letter
3.2C
3.3C
3.4G
3.4H
3.4I
1.4
3.1
3.7
3.1A
3.1B
3.23
15761
15770
3.1E
3.1B
15050
15060
15899
3.1E
3.1F
3.1I
3.1C
3.1I
3.2
3.1C
16470
16623
16721
3.1
3.1
3.2
16722
3.2
17000
3.4D
15820
15846
Cold Fluid-Applied
Waterproofing
Building Insulation
Firestopping
(CSPE) Single-ply
membrane roofing
Joint Sealants
Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Swinging Automatic
Entrance Doors
Glazing
Tile
Wood Flooring
Resilient Tile Flooring
Carpet
Wall Coverings
Projection Screens
Dumbwaiters (if picked up)
Adjusting, Balancing, and
System Testing
Demolition
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Vibration Isolation
Water Treatment
Plumbing General
Provisions
Fan Coil Units
Packaged Air Handling
Units
Fans
Pre-fabricated Ductwork
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Units
Panelboards
Elevator Equipment Wiring
Fire Alarm and Smoke
Detection System
Intrusion Detection and
Security Access System
Building Automation System
Certification
Requirement
Certification Record
Pre-application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Pre-application
Post application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Post application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Post application
Post application
Pre-application
Letter
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Post application
Post application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Post application
Pre-application
Pre-application
Post application
Periodic
Post application
Post application
Letter
Letter
Letter
Letter
Letter
Letter
Bi-weekly CQC report
Letter
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Letter
Post application
Post application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Post application
Post application
Pre-application
Post application
Pre-application
Post application
Post application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Letter
Post application
Pre-application
Post application
Bi-weekly CQC report
Bi-weekly CQC report
Letter
Post application
Letter
Post application
Letter
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01400 - 6
Date
Complete
d
[Periodic]
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01420
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes reference standards, definitions and specification format and content.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions of the Construction
Contract and HECOM
B.
Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to requirements expressed by graphic representations, or in
written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Terms such as
“shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the user locate the reference.
C.
Directed: The term “directed” is a command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including
“requested,” “authorized,” “selected,” “approved,” and “permitted” have the same meaning as
“directed.”
D.
Approved: The term “approved”, when used to convey Architect's action on CM/GC's submittals,
applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
E.
Regulations: The term “regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
F.
Furnish: The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G.
Install: The term “install” describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporary
storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
Provide: The term “provide” means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
Submitted: The terms “submitted”, “reported”, “satisfactory” and similar words and phrases means
submitted to Architect, reported to Architect and similar phrases.
J.
Installer: An “Installer” is the CM/GC or another entity engaged by the CM/GC, as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 1
REFERENCES
K.
Experienced: The term “experienced”, when used with an entity, means having successfully
completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar
with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authority having
jurisdiction.
L.
Trades: Using terms such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of
the corresponding generic name.
M.
Project Site: The term "Project site" means the space available for performing construction
activities. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical
with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
N.
Testing Agencies: A “testing agency” is an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to
interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.3
SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A.
Specification Format: Divisions 02 through 49 of these Specifications are organized into Divisions
and Sections based on the 50-Division format and CSI/CSC’s “Master Format” numbering system
while Divisions 00 and 01 of these Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based
on the 16-Division format and CSI/CSC’s “Master Format” numbering system.
1.
B.
Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract
Documents.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but
not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as
plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the CM/GC. At
certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities
that must be fulfilled indirectly by the CM/GC, or by others when so noted.
The words “shall” "shall be" or “shall comply with”, depending on the context are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of
the Contract Documents by reference.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 2
REFERENCES
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with
these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the
context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
E.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
F.
Industry Organization Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications and other Contract Documents they shall mean the name of a trade association,
standards-developing organization or other entity in the context of referencing a standard or
publication. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents,
mean the associated names.
1.
2.
AA
AAADM
AABC
AAMA
AAN
AASHTO
AATCC
ABMA
ACI
ACPA
ADC
AEIC
AFPA
AF&PA
AGA
AGC
AHA
AHAM
AI
AIA
AISC
AISI
AITC
ALA
Where other Sections of the Specifications require that a product, material, or installation
complies with specified industry standard, the CM/GC shall obtain copies directly from the
publication source, and submit copies of standards at same time as submittal of other
specified submittals.
Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed, but not assured, to
be accurate and up to date as of the date of Contract Documents.
Refer to Gale Research’s "Encyclopedia of Associations," or Columbia Book’s “National
Trade and Professional Association of the U.S.”.
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
Associated Air Balance Council
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
American Association of Nurserymen
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
American Concrete Institute/ACI International
American Concrete Pipe Association
Air Diffusion Council
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
American Forest & Paper Association
American Forest & Paper Association
American Gas Association
Associated General Contractors of America (The)
American Hardboard Association
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
Asphalt Institute
American Institute of Architects (The)
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Institute of Timber Construction
American Laminators Association
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 3
www.aluminum.org
www.taol.com/aaadm
www.aabchq.com
www.aamanet.org
(See ANLA)
www.aashto.org
www.aatcc.org
www.abma-dc.org
www.aci-int.org
www.concrete-pipe.org
www.aeic.org
(See AF&PA)
www.afandpa.org
www.aga.org
www.agc.org
www.ahardbd.org
www.aham.org
www.asphaltinstitute.org
www.aiaonline.org
www.aisc.org
www.steel.org
(See LMA)
REFERENCES
ALCA
ALSC
AMCA
ANLA
ANSI
AOSA
APA
APA
API
ARI
ASCA
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWCI
AWCMA
AWI
AWPA
AWS
AWWA
BHMA
BIA
BIFMA
CCC
CCFSS
CDA
CEA
CFFA
CGA
CGSB
CIMA
CISCA
CISPI
CLFMI
CPA
CPPA
CRI
CRSI
CSA
CSI
CSSB
CTI
DHI
EIA/TIA
EIMA
EJMA
FCI
FGMA
FM
FMG
GA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
American Lumber Standard Committee
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
American Nursery & Landscape Association
(Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen)
American National Standards Institute
Association of Official Seed Analysts
APA-The Engineered Wood Association
Architectural Precast Association
American Petroleum Institute
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
Architectural Spray Coaters Association
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWCI International
(Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
Architectural Woodwork Institute
American Wood-Preservers' Association
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Brick Industry Association (The)
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
Carpet Cushion Council
Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures
Copper Development Association Inc.
Canadian Electricity Association (The)
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
Compressed Gas Association
Canadian General Standards Board
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Composite Panel Association
(Formerly: National Particleboard Association)
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
Division of Plastics Pipe Institute
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
Division of Canadian Standards Association
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
Cooling Tower Institute
Door and Hardware Institute
Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry
Association
EIFS Industry Members Association
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
Fluid Controls Institute
Flat Glass Marketing Association
Factory Mutual System
FM Global
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
Gypsum Association
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 4
www.alca.org
www.amca.org
www.anla.org
www.ansi.org
www.zianet.com/AOSA
www.apawood.org
www.archprecast.org
www.api.org
www.ari.org
www.ascassoc.com
www.asce.org
www.ashrae.org
www.asme.org
www.asse-plumbing.org
www.astm.org
www.awci.org
(See WCMA)
www.awinet.org
www.awpa.com
www.aws.org
www.awwa.org
www.buildershardware.com
www.bia.org
www.bifma.com
www.carpetcushion.org
www.umr.edu/~ccfss
www.copper.org
www.canelect.ca
www.taol.com/cffa
www.cganet.com
www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb
www.cellulose.org
www.cisca.org
www.cispi.org
www.chainlinkinfo.com (under
construction)
www.pbmdf.com
www.cppa-info.org
www.carpet-rug.com
www.crsi.org
www.iasapprovals.org
www.csinet.org
www.cedarbureau.org
www.cti.org
www.dhi.org
www.eia.org
www.eifsfacts.com
www.ejma.org
www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
(See GANA)
(See FMG)
www.fmglobal.com
www.gypsum.org
REFERENCES
GANA
GRI
GTA
HI
HI
HMMA
HPVA
HPW
IAS
ICEA
ICRI
IEC
IEEE
IESNA
IGCC
ILI
IRI
ITS
IWS
KCMA
LGSI
LMA
LPI
LSGA
MBMA
MFMA
MFMA
MGPHO
MHIA
MIA
ML/SFA
MSS
NAAMM
NAAMM
NACE
NAIMA
NAMI
NAPM
NBGQA
NCMA
NCPI
NCTA
NEBB
NECA
NeLMA
NEMA
NETA
NFPA
NFRC
NGA
NHLA
NLGA
NOFMA
NPA
NRCA
NRMCA
Glass Association of North America
(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
Geosynthetic Research Institute
Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North
America
Hydraulic Institute
Hydronics Institute
Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
Division of National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
International Approval Services
(See CSA International)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
International Concrete Repair Institute
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (The)
Insulating Glass Certification Council
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
HSB Industrial Risk Insurers
Intertek Testing Services
Insect Screening Weavers Association
(Now defunct)
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
Light Gage Structural Institute
Laminating Materials Association
(Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association)
Lightning Protection Institute
Laminated Safety Glass Association
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization, Inc.
Material Handling Industry of America
Marble Institute of America
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(See SSMA)
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry, Inc.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc.
National Association of Photographic Manufacturers
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
National Concrete Masonry Association
National Clay Pipe Institute
National Cable Television Association
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
National Electrical Contractors Association
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Fenestration Rating Council
National Glass Association
National Hardwood Lumber Association
National Lumber Grades Authority
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
National Particleboard Association
National Roofing Contractors Association
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 5
www.glasswebsite.com/gana
www.drexel.edu/gri
(See GANA)
www.gamanet.org
(See NAAMM)
www.hpva.org
www.icea.net
www.icri.org
www.iec.ch
www.ieee.org
www.iesna.org
www.igcc.org
www.iliai.com
www.industrialrisk.com
www.itsglobal.com
www.kcma.org
www.loseke.com
www.lma.org
www.lightning.org
(See GANA)
www.mbma.com
www.maplefloor.org
www.mgpho.org
www.mhia.org
www.marble-institute.com
www.mss-hq.com
www.naamm.org
(See GANA)
www.nace.org
www.naima.org
(See PIMA)
www.nbgqa.com
www.ncma.org
www.ncpi.org
www.ncta.com
www.nebb.org
www.necanet.org
www.nelma.org
www.nema.org
www.electricnet.com/net
www.nfpa.org
www.nfrc.org
www.glass.org
www.natlhardwood.org
www.nlga.org
www.nofma.org
(See CPA)
www.nrca.net
www.nrmca.org
REFERENCES
NSA
NSF
NTMA
NWWDA
PCI
PDCA
PDI
PGI
PIMA
RCSC
RFCI
RIS
RMA
SAE
SDI
SDI
SEFA
SGCC
SIGMA
SJI
SMA
SMACNA
SPFA
SPI
SPIB
SPI/SPFD
SPRI
SSINA
SSMA
SSPC
STI
SWI
SWRI
TCA
TIA/EIA
TPI
TPI
UFAC
UL
UNI
USITT
USP
WASTEC
WCLIB
WCMA
WDMA
WIC
WMMPA
WWPA
National Stone Association
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (The)
National Wood Window and Door Association
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PVC Geomembrane Institute/Technology Program
University of Illinois-Urbana Champaign
Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NAPM - National Association of Photographic Manufacturers)
Research Council on Structural Connections (c/o AISC)
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
Redwood Inspection Service
Division of the California Redwood Association
Rubber Manufacturers Association
SAE International
Steel Deck Institute
Steel Door Institute
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
Safety Glazing Certification Council
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
Steel Joist Institute
Screen Manufacturers Association
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD The Society of the
Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division
SPRI
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association)
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
Steel Tank Institute
Steel Window Institute
Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute
Tile Council of America, Inc.
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
Truss Plate Institute
Turfgrass Producers International
Upholstered Furniture Action Council
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
U.S. Pharmacopeia
Waste Equipment Technology Association
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: AWCMA-American Window Covering Manufacturers Association)
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA-National Wood Window and Door Association)
Woodwork Institute of California
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
Western Wood Products Association
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 6
www.aggregates.org
www.nsf.org
www.ntma.com
(See WDMA)
www.pci.org
www.pdca.com
www.pdionline.org
//pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
www.pima.net
www.boltcouncil.org
(Contact by mail only)
www.calredwood.org
www.rma.org
www.sae.org
www.sdi.org
www.steeldoor.org
www.sefalabfurn.com
www.sgcc.org
www.sigmaonline.org/sigma
www.steeljoist.org
www.smacna.org
www.sprayfoam.org
www.plasticsindustry.org
www.spib.org
(See SPI)
www.spri.org
www.ssina.com
www.ssma.com
www.sspc.org
www.steeltank.com
www.steelwindows.com
www.swrionline.org
www.tileusa.com
www.tiaonline.org
www.turfgrasssod.org
www.ufac.org
www.ul.com
//members.aol.com/unibell
www.culturenet.ca/usitt
www.usp.org
www.wastec.org
www.wclib.org
www.windowcoverings.org
www.wdma.com
www.wicnet.org
www.wmmpa.com
www.wwpa.org
REFERENCES
G.
Code Agency Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the following
entities. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and
up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
CABO
IAPMO
ICBO
ICC
BOCA International, Inc.
Council of American Building Officials
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
International Conference of Building Officials
International Code Council
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
SBCCI
H.
www.sbcci.org
Federal Government Agency Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are
used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
following entities. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADA
ADAAG
CE
CFR
CPSC
CRD
DOC
DOD
EPA
FAA
FCC
FDA
FED-STD
FS
FTMS
GSA
HUD
LBL
LBNL
MILSPEC
NCHRP
NIST
OSHA
RUS
TRB
UFAS
USDA
USPS
www.bocai.org
(See ICC)
www.iapmo.org
www.icbo.org
www.intlcode.org
Americans with Disabilities Act.
Americans with Disabilities ACT (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities Available from Access Board
Army Corps of Engineers
Code of Federal Regulations
Consumer Product Safety Commission
Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers
Waterways Experiment Station
Department of Commerce
Department of Defense
DOD Specifications and Standards
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
Federal Communications Commission
Food and Drug Administration
Federal Standard
Federal Specification
(Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS)
Federal Test Method Standard
General Services Administration
Department of Housing and Urban Development
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
Military Specification and Standards
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
National Institute of Standards and Technology
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(See CFR 29)
Rural Utilities Service
Transportation Research Board
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board
Department of Agriculture
Postal Service
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 7
(See ADAAG)
www.access.board.gov
CRD Standards
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr
www.cpsc.gov
www.wes.army.mil
www.doc.gov
//astimage.daps.dla.mil/online
www.epa.gov
www.faa.gov
www.fcc.gov
www.fda.gov
(See FS)
(See FS)
www.gsa.gov
www.hud.gov
(See LBNL)
www.lbl.gov
(See DOD)
(See TRB)
www.nist.gov
www.osha.gov
(See USDA)
www.nas.edu/trb
www.access-board.gov
www.usda.gov
www.usps.gov
REFERENCES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01420 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
TEMPORARY MATERIALS
A.
1.2
Temporary materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for required usage,
must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A.
University will provide the CM/GC with electricity for construction use. The CM/GC is
responsible for coordinating work related electrical requirements and protecting the building
within the limits of available electrical power, without compromising the University’s need for
electricity. The CM/GC is responsible for energy conservation and reasonable construction use
of electrical power. Should the University determine an unreasonable or excessive use of
electricity, the CM/GC shall pay for additional power above the reasonable amount. Should the
CM/GC's use of electricity required for work exceed the limits of available power in the building
the CM/GC shall reduce power consumed and/or pay for such modifications as required to
eliminate compromising the University's system.
B.
CM/GC shall provide branch distribution system from temporary power source with distribution
boxes and outlets located so that power and lighting is available throughout active work areas.
C.
Permanent receptacles may be utilized during construction.
D.
Existing receptacles may be utilized as source of temporary electric service for remodeling work
within existing building.
E.
CM/GC shall replace receptacle plates and wiring devices damaged during construction.
F.
CM/GC shall provide lighting to ensure safe construction operations and to allow proper
finishing operations.
G.
Permanent lighting system may be utilized during construction.
H.
Existing lighting system may be utilized for temporary lighting for remodeling work within
existing building.
I.
CM/GC shall restore permanent [and/or existing] lighting systems used during construction to
new and/or original condition. Replace defective fixtures, controls, and other component parts.
Clean fixtures. Replace lamps. Lighting shall not be directed skyward.
J.
All temporary wiring shall be removed before completion of project.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 1
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
1.3
TEMPORARY HEATING COOLING AND VENTILATING
A.
Prior to enclosure, provide heating, cooling and ventilation as necessary to protect materials,
products, and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B.
Enclosure is defined as state of construction when exterior walls are erected, doors and
windows are installed and glazed, roof deck and roofing are complete, and when other openings
in exterior envelope are equipped with temporary enclosures.
C.
Except where indicated otherwise in individual specification sections, maintain minimum
ambient temperature of 50 deg°F in construction areas.
D.
Provide heating, cooling and ventilation as necessary to maintain specified conditions during
construction.
E.
Provide and pay for costs of supervision, operation, maintenance, fuel, and energy consumed.
F.
Use of permanent heating/ventilating and associated distribution systems will be permitted only
upon meeting following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in
place.
Verify that reasonable closures from the external environment exist.
Equipment installed complete with accessories, started-up, maintained, serviced, and
operated in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Provide and pay for regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
Operation of permanent systems or any portion thereof to provide temporary
heat/ventilation does not constitute acceptance of system or such portion thereof.
Time period contained in warranties for heating/ventilating systems shall begin on date of
Substantial Completion as certified by A/E and shall not begin on date of use, unless
such date is certified by A/E as date of Substantial Completion.
Immediately before Substantial Completion, completely clean each permanent unit used,
install new filters, and perform service functions required for placing units in use and
qualifying for specified warranties.
G.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
H.
No permanent HVAC system shall be operated without the permanent filters and/or strainers.
Upon substantial completion all filters and/or strainers shall be replaced with new filter/strainers.
All temporary filters shall be removed prior to occupancy.
1.4
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE
A.
Provide and pay for telephone service to temporary field office at time of Project mobilization.
B.
Provide and pay for telephone service for use by construction personnel.
C.
Cellphones or radios shall be permitted for this project.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 2
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
1.5
TEMPORARY WATER
A.
The University will provide the CM/GC with existing source(s) of water for construction use. The
CM/GC is responsible for coordinating work related temporary water requirements and
protecting the building within the limits of available water resources, without compromising the
University’s need for water. The CM/GC is responsible for water conservation and reasonable
construction use when utilizing temporary or permanent water supply systems. Should the
University determine an unreasonable or excessive use of water, the CM/GC shall pay for water
useage and related sewer costs above the reasonable amount. Should the CM/GC's use of
water required for work exceed the limits of available water to the building the CM/GC shall
reduce water consumed and/or pay for such modifications as required to eliminate
compromising the University's system ability to meet water requirements for existing services.
B.
Responsible for connecting to the service point or system designated by the Facilities
Operations Department, and for furnishing, installing, and removing all temporary service
required for water during construction, including protection of potable water system.
C.
Extended branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
D.
All temporary piping shall be removed before completion of the project.
1.6
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities and enclosures.
B.
Existing and new permanent facilities are not available for use.
1.7
TEMPORARY ELEVATORS
A.
CM/GC requests for use of existing elevators must be submitted to the University for approval
and certify that during construction the CM/GC will comply with the following:
1.
2.
1.8
Furnish, install, and maintain temporary protection of existing components, including cab
and entrances.
Remove temporary protection devices after temporary use is no longer required; Restore
elevator system to original condition; Replace damaged and worn components.
TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES
A.
1.9
CM/GC can establish an onsite office only within the construction area of this project and only in
such a way that it does not impede any of the project occupancies.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CLOSURES
A.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing
facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
B.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-ofway and for public access to existing building.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 3
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
C.
Interior Closures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.10
Provide temporary barriers to separate construction areas from University occupied
areas, to prevent penetration of dust into occupied areas, to prevent entry of
unauthorized persons in construction areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials
and equipment.
Construct of adequate framing and surface with non-combustible materials having closed
joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces.
Closures with fire rated corridors shall meet fire-rating equivalents.
Paint surfaces exposed to view in occupied areas in colors directed by the Architect.
TEMPORARY PARKING
A.
Temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel are not available.
B.
Existing on-site streets and parking facilities may not be used by construction personnel.
C.
Parking violators are subject to towing and fines.
1.11
A.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Site Dust Control:
1.
2.
B.
Security:
1.
2.
C.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work and existing premises from unauthorized
entry, vandalism, and theft.
Conduct operations in manner to avoid risk of loss, theft or damage by vandalism.
Noise Control:
1.
2.
3.
1.12
Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
Execute Work as quietly as practicable to avoid unnecessary disturbances to occupants
within premises.
High-level noise operations must be performed in accordance with local regulations and
must be approved by University prior to proceeding.
Loud noise and vibrations, which cause disturbance in hospital and/or laboratory areas,
must be controlled and coordinated in advance with the University.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed Work in manner to prevent damage from construction operations.
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual Specifications section.
C.
Provide temporary and removable materials for protection of installed products. Control activity
in immediate work area to minimize damage.
D.
Protect finished Work from damage, defacements, stains, scratches and wear.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 4
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
E.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from weatherproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
F.
Prohibit traffic on lawn and landscaped areas.
1.13
TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
A.
Install, maintain, and operate temporary utilities and services to ensure continuous operation.
Modify and extend systems as Work progresses.
B.
Install temporary facilities and controls in manner to produce reasonable uniform appearance,
structurally adequate for required purposes, and properly maintained.
C.
Modify and relocate temporary facilities and controls as necessary to accommodate progress of
Work.
1.14
CLEANING, REMOVAL AND RESTORATION
A.
Maintain construction site in a clean and orderly manner. Provide for routine removal of trash
and construction debris. Provide appropriate waste receptacles and containers on site.
Remove all containers prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B.
Remove all temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, and
materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
C.
Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D.
Restore existing facilities and equipment used during construction to original condition. Restore
permanent facilities and equipment used during construction to specified condition.
1.15
A.
UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS
Existing Utility Interruptions at Renovation Work: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
Related Section: Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECITON
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 5
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01500 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01502
DUST CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Construction activities causing disturbance of existing dust, or creating new dust, must be
conducted in tight enclosures cutting off any flow of dust particles into adjacent occupied areas.
B.
Before any construction on site begins, properly brief all workers on site to ensure full
compliance with the dust control measures in the construction documents. Conduct a field
review of all dust control policies. Fill out and sign a checklist, approved by the CAM.
C.
Install temporary construction dust control barriers and closures above ceilings to prevent the
transmission of dust into adjacent occupied areas.
D.
Do not allow dust and debris to accumulate. Remove dust daily. Transport all demolished or
removed material in tightly sealed, covered rubber tired containers. Fit out containers with
clean polyethylene covers. Seal completely at perimeters. Before leaving construction areas
wipe clean all containers with a damp sponge to prevent tracking of dust. Place the sponge and
pail inside the dust control barrier entrance and keep them clean and changed daily.
E.
Provide temporary fans, associated ductwork, and dust control barriers required to maintain a
negative pressure in the work area relative to the surrounding occupied areas. Provide HEPA
filtered exhaust fans when utilizing existing exhaust duct system. Submit plan for achieving
negative pressure to the CAM for review. Install a visual monitoring system to demonstrate that
the area is under negative pressure at all times until construction barriers are removed.
F.
Provide walk off mats at inside dust control barrier entrances. Vacuum or change walk-off mats
daily or more often as necessary to prevent accumulation of dust. Additionally, provide (sticky)
walk-off mat immediately outside dust control barrier entrances.
G.
Immediately remove any dust tracked outside a dust control barrier.
H.
Immediately replace any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond the sealed
areas when unattended. If the ceiling tile is removed from any inpatient area, outpatient
transplant clinic or outpatient cancer clinic, then patients must be removed from the space for at
least one hour after the ceiling tile is replaced.
I.
Block off existing ventilation ducts within the construction area. Cap ducts to be dust tight and
to withstand airflow and pressure.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01502 - 1
DUST CONTROL
J.
Carefully remove dust control barriers and ceiling protection to minimize the spread of dirt and
debris. Obtain approval of University's CAM before proceeding with removal of dust control
barriers and ceiling protection. Clean the renovated area before removal of barriers by: a) wet
mop all vinyl or sheet flooring, b) vacuum all carpet or soft surfaces with a HEPA filtered
vacuum, c) wipe all surfaces with disinfectant
K.
Take immediate action to clean deficient areas.
deficiencies are corrected.
Cease other construction work until
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL BARRIERS
A.
Provide temporary dust control barriers where indicated and where reasonably required to
ensure protection from dust. (FOR CLASS V ONLY- Dust control barriers shall be full height,
non-combustible construction, with a minimum 1/2" gypsum board on one side.) (FOR CLASS
IV ONLY- Install plastic dust barriers to seal work area from non-work areas, or implement
control cube method (cart with plastic covering and sealed connection to work site with HEPA
vacuum). Use 3-inch wide duct tape to tightly seal the perimeter of both sides of the barriers.
Install tape in a neat and continuous manner. Finish paint outer surface of each barrier. Match
door and frame finish to existing adjacent areas.
1.
2.
3.
Dust control barrier doors: 3'-0" minimum width, with frame, hardware, lock set keyed to
University system, and heavy duty closer. Tightly weather-strip door to prevent flow of
dust into patient areas. Locate doors as directed and swing into construction areas.
Keep barrier doors locked outside of working hours. Precut all material for barriers in
unoccupied areas.
Dust control barriers may not reduce exit access corridors below the required width of 44
inches.
(CLASS V ONLY) Seal all door openings to adjacent areas with duct tape.
B.
Provide rigid non-combustible foil faced insulation board barriers, Certaineed WP225, Owens
Corning, or equivalent, to seal patient areas from work areas, at the perimeter of work areas,
and between finish ceiling and upper concrete slab. Cut to fit around all existing utilities. Seal
with tape or foam around penetrations. (Note- dust barriers may also be constructed as
temporary fire/ smoke barriers. As such the gypsum board should continue to the floor slab
above. See drawings for appropriate wall type.
C.
Schedule with the CAM work described in the construction documents outside the construction
dust control barriers, including work in corridors and lobbies.
D.
Do not store any construction equipment or material outside the construction dust control barrier
without the University's written permission.
E.
Keep dust control barriers in a neat clean and dust tight condition at all times. Provide
necessary manpower and equipment (dust and wet mops, brooms, buckets and clean wiping
rags, HEPA Vacuums) for cleaning fine dust from floors in occupied areas and to keep adjacent
occupied areas clean at all times.
F.
Provide dust tight polyethylene covering taped in place to completely seal opening until final
patching is done, whenever openings are made into walls or ceilings in-patient occupied areas.
This procedure may only be done if work is completed in one shift.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01502 - 2
DUST CONTROL
G.
Keep construction areas swept clean with sweeping compound and keep clear of debris daily
throughout the course of construction.
H.
Complete and place into operation all of the above described items of work before beginning
demolition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Maintain and operate dust control systems to provide continuous protection to occupied areas
of the hospital.
B.
Modify and extend systems as required.
C.
Removal and reconditioning:
1.
2.
3.2
Remove all temporary services installed as a requirement of the Contract Documents.
Restore utilities to original condition at the completion of the Work.
Legally and properly dispose of all debris resulting from the removal and reconditioning
operations.
ENFORCEMENT
A.
If violations and/or non-compliance occur, the University has the right to halt all construction
until deficiencies are corrected. The CM/GC will bear full responsibility for any delay of work.
B.
A record of each dust control violation will be maintained by the CAM.
C.
Failure of the CM/GC to immediately mitigate and promptly correct deficiencies is sufficient
grounds for termination and will result in corrective action being taken by the University. All
resulting costs will be the responsibility of the CM/GC.
D.
Continued violations will be cause to find the CM/GC in non-compliance with contract
documents and shall be sufficient grounds for termination
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01502 - 3
DUST CONTROL
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01502 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirement for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of Contract
are included in another Division 01 Section “Product Substitution Procedures”.
C.
Procedures for receiving and installing products furnished by University are included in another
Division 01 Section ”University Furnished Products”.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
CM/GC shall comply with environmental laws controlling hazardous substances.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,”
“equipment,” “system,” and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Products: Items that are demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, and equipment from those required by the
Contract Documents and proposed by CM/GC. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product
Substitution Procedures”.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Standard Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is
named and accompanied by the words "Product Standard," including make or model number or
other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, inservice performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to University.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
University.
F.
Hazardous Substances Prohibited by Law: Including, but not limited to, any product, material,
element, constituent, chemical, substance, compound, or mixture, which is defined in, included
under, or regulated by any environmental laws.
G.
Environmental Laws: Applicable local, state, and federal laws, rules, ordinances, codes,
regulations, and requirements in effect at the time CM/GC’s services are rendered, any
amendments for CM/GC’s services rendered after the effective date of any such amendments,
including, without limitation, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.4
The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980.
The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.
The Toxic Substances Control Act.
The Clean Water Act.
The Clean Air Act.
The Marine Protection Research and Sanctuaries Act.
The Occupational Safety and Health Act.
The Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986.
The Environmental Protection Agency.
Other state superlien or environmental clean-up or disclosure statutes including all state
and local counterparts of such.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
CM/GC shall submit an affidavit on construction company letterhead signed by an officer of the
company, notarized by a notary public, which certifies compliance with the environmental laws
controlling hazardous substances for the construction of this Project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If CM/GC is given option of selecting between two or more products or
materials for use on Project, product or material selected shall be compatible with products or
materials previously selected, even if previously selected products or materials were also
options.
B.
When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's
printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the
installation, including two copies to the Architect.
1.
C.
Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until
completion.
Compliance: CM/GC shall take whatever measures deemed necessary to insure that all
employees, suppliers, vendors, fabricators, subcontractors, or their assigns, to comply with
hazardous substance requirements.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products and materials to Project site in an undamaged condition in
manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels
and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store products in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
PRODUCT AND MATERIAL WARRANTIES
A.
General: Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve CM/GC of obligations under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in each Section shall not deprive University of
other rights University may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CM/GC under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
C.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide
standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
University reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Products and materials brought onto the Project Site, and products and materials
incorporated into the Work, shall comply with environmental laws.
B.
Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, or assembly,
listing exact characteristics required, without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product,
material or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract
requirements.
C.
Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with
performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance
of a product is implied where the product or material is specified for a specific application.
1.
Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by
the manufacturer's certification of performance.
D.
Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications only require
compliance with imposed code, standard or regulation, select product that complies with
standards, codes or regulations specified.
E.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established sample,
select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
1.
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on
"substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 4
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
F.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "custom range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
Special Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “special custom range
of colors patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Architect will select a new color, pattern, or
texture different from those normally produced by the manufacturer.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
For products proprietarily specified by a "Named Manufacturer" and model name or number,
this is to establish standard of quality.
Other manufacturers listed as "Acceptable
Manufacturers" have been listed because they have implied compliance with requirements of
the "Named Manufacturer".
Listed "Acceptable Manufacturers" are not considered
"Substitutions", and therefore, are not required to be submitted as such. However, costs,
including professional service fees for changes or modifications to adjacent, contiguous,
surrounding, supporting, or otherwise related areas, portions or parts of Project which are
required to accommodate products and materials of "Acceptable Manufacturers", for complete,
proper and functional installation, in lieu of specified "Named Manufacturer", shall be borne or
paid by CM/GC.
B.
For products specified by naming several "Acceptable Manufacturers", select one of products,
or manufacturers named, which complies with Contract Documents.
Requests for
manufacturer's products not listed must be submitted as Substitutions.
C.
For products specified by naming only one product, or manufacturer, CM/GC must submit
request as for substitutions for product, or manufacturer not specifically named.
D.
For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer and indicated as "no
substitute", there is no option.
E.
For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that
those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements
contained in Contract Documents.
B.
Inspect products immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and
defective items.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 5
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
C.
Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure
Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.
D.
Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best
visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.
E.
Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.
F.
Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best
possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible product or
material as necessary to prevent deterioration.
G.
Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting
heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable
mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.
H.
Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products and materials in accord with
manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1.
2.
Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions,
consult with manufacturer for further instructions.
Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
I.
Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step
or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.
J.
Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.2
RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
A.
CM/GC agrees that it shall not knowingly after reasonable diligence and effort, incorporate into
the Work any hazardous substance other than as may be lawfully contained within products,
except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. Further, in performing any of its
obligations hereunder, CM/GC shall not cause any release of hazardous substances into, or
contamination of, the environment, including soil, the atmosphere, any watercourse or ground
water, except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. In the event that CM/GC
engages in any of the activities prohibited in this paragraph, to the fullest extent permitted by
law, CM/GC hereby indemnifies and holds harmless University and its partners, members,
officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against any and all claims,
damages, losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited
to, expenses of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorney’s fees, arising out of,
incidental to or resulting from the activities prohibited.
B.
In the event CM/GC observes on the Project Site any substance which CM/GC reasonably
believes to be a hazardous substance, and which is being introduced into the Work, or exists on
the Project Site, in a manner violative of any applicable environmental laws, CM/GC shall
immediately notify University and report the condition to University in writing. The Work in the
affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written authorization of University if in
fact a hazardous substance has been encountered and has not been rendered harmless. In the
event that CM/GC fails to give University proper notification hereunder, upon knowingly
observing a hazardous substance at the Project Site, to the fullest extent permitted by the law,
CM/GC hereby indemnifies and holds harmless University, and all of its partners, members,
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 6
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against all claims, damages,
losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited to, expenses
of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees, arising out of, incidental to, or
resulting from CM/GC’s failure to stop the Work.
C.
3.3
If University believes that hazardous substances may have been located, generated,
manufactured, used or disposed of on or about the Project Site by CM/GC or any of its
employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers, or invitees, University may have environmental
studies of the Project Site conducted as it deems appropriate, and CM/GC shall be responsible
for the cost of such studies to the extent that CM/GC or any of its employees, agents,
subcontractors, suppliers or invitees are responsible for the presence of any hazardous
substances.
CASEWORK
A.
The CM/GC shall procure all project casework from the University purchasing department’s
preselected casework manufacturers listed at:
1.
http://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagepacontracts&q=casework&sort=category
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 7
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01600 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01630
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
(See General Conditions §26 in either the HECO-7/CO-7, HECO-7CM, or HECO-7DB/CO-7DB as
applicable.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
1.2
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents.
B.
Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
required by Contract Documents proposed by CM/GC after award of Contract are considered
requests for "substitutions." Following are not considered substitutions:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Revisions to Contract Documents requested by University or Architect.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents.
CM/GC's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by
governing authorities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit three copies of each request for product substitution complete with properly executed form
and all supporting data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Bids shall be based upon providing specified materials, products, Acceptable Manufacturers,
organizations, and applications; identified in these Specifications or indicated on Drawings.
B.
CM/GC's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for
construction activities not complying with Contract Documents does not constitute acceptable or
valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.
C.
CM/GC's substitution request will be received and considered by Architect when one or more of
following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise requests will be returned
without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1.
Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01630 - 1
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Proposed changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents.
Request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within Contract Time.
Request will not be considered if product or method cannot be provided as result of failure to
pursue Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by governing
authority, and requested substitution can be approved.
Substantial advantage is offered University, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or
other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities University must assume.
Additional responsibilities for University may include compensation to Architect for redesign
and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by University, and similar
considerations.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in manner that is compatible
with other materials, and where CM/GC certifies that substitution will overcome
incompatibility.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and
where CM/GC certifies that proposed substitution can be coordinated.
Specified product or method of construction cannot provide warranty required by Contract
Documents and where CM/GC certifies that proposed substitution provide required warranty.
D.
Due to limited time available during bidding period, request for substitutions will not be evaluated by
Architect until after “Notice to Proceed”. For period of sixty (60) consecutive calendar days after
“Notice to Proceed”, substitutions will be considered by Architect. Requests for substitution after
that time will be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
E.
Burden of proof of equality rests with CM/GC.
F.
Submit separate request for each Product Substitution, on Architect's standard form "HKS
Substitution Request Form 01630", copy at end of this section, supported with complete data,
technical literature, drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
By making request for substitution, CM/GC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with that specified. (Submit data for both
products)
Changes required in other elements of work because of substitution.
Effect on construction schedule.
Cost data comparing proposed substitution with Product specified.
Required license fees or royalties.
Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials.
List of appropriate installations.
Represents and warrants that CM/GC has personally investigated proposed substitution
product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified;
Represents and warrants that CM/GC will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution
That CM/GC would for that specified.
Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
Contract except for Architect's redesign cost, and waives all claims for additional costs
related to substitution which may subsequently become apparent; and
Will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such other changes as may be
required to make Work complete in all respects.
Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify CM/GC, in
writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01630 - 2
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
I.
University and Architect reserve right to accept or reject proposed substitutions. Each request shall
state amount of savings to University, if substitution is accepted. Acceptance of proposed
substitution does not constitute approval or inclusion in Architect's and Consultant's Documents.
Pay applications certification, change orders, and certificate of substantial completion will contain
such qualification.
J.
Cost of testing required for analysis of proposed substitution shall be paid for by CM/GC at testing
agency selected and approved by Architect.
K.
Should substitution be accepted, CM/GC shall be responsible to make necessary adjustments in
Work which may be affected as result of substitution at no additional cost.
L.
CM/GC warrants that substituted material or system will perform same as original specified material
or system would have performed. Should accepted substitution fail to perform as required, CM/GC
shall replace substitute material or system with that specified and bear costs incurred thereby.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01630 - 3
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01630 - 4
Substitution Request Form 01630
To HKS Contract Manager
HKS Project No.
16567.001
Project Name
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
UVA UH LEVEL 1 RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT
REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
Specified Item
Section
Page
Paragraph
Description
The undersigned General Contractor requests consideration of the following:
Proposed Substitution
(Include all product data as indicated in Specification Section 01630 and any supplemental
information as requested by the Architect.)
The undersigned General Contractor warrants to the Architect and Owner that the following paragraphs, unless modified
on attachments, are correct.
1.
The Proposed Substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.
2.
The cost reduction/increase indicated in item 5 below includes costs for changes to the building design, including
engineering, design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested Substitution. Any additional costs
resulting from this substitution will be reimbursed from the cost savings in item 5 or, in it’s absence, funded as a
project cost.
3.
The Proposed Substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified
warranty requirements.
4.
Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the Proposed Substitution.
The General Contractor further warrants to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed
Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The General Contractor further warrants that
specification section 01630, paragraph 2.1G intent has been met.
5.
Total Cost Savings/Increase to the Owner: $
Manufacturer’s Certification of Equal Quality
I
represent the manufacturer of the Proposed Substitution item and hereby
certify and warrant to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or
superior to the Specified Item.
Manufacturer’s Representative
Date
Company
General Contractor Acceptance
Date
Company
Owner Acceptance
Date
Company
Architect Acceptance
Date
Company
Acceptances
1.
2.
3.
Recommend Acceptance:
Yes
No
©HKS-01630-2009
HKS ARCHITECTS, INC.
2100 EAST CARY STREET,
SUITE 100
RICHMOND, VA 23223
804.644.8400
FAX
804.644.8469
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01640
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes work required to relocate and install University furnished products indicated by
Contract Documents and furnish supplementary items necessary for their proper installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Obtain following from University or University’s product manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Shop drawings for product requirements.
Installation drawings for items requiring coordination with work of other Sections.
Actual layout of installations pertinent to this Work.
Rough-in requirements.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Installation of University furnished products shall be by skilled experienced and qualified mechanics
of the appropriate trade for the work involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, UNIVERSITY INSTALLED PRODUCT
A.
The specific product is not in this contract, and actual installation of the product will be made by the
University.
B.
Products will be indicated as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
Product prefixed with "Space for".
N.I.C.
University Furnished - University Installed.
Product noted as "Future".
Roughing-in for University Furnished, University Installed Product is provided by applicable Sections
governing the type of work. Obtain rough-in requirements from University.
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, CM/GC INSTALLED PRODUCT
A.
Install products indicated as follows:
1.
2.
University Furnished, CM/GC Installed".
“Reuse”.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01640 - 1
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS
3.
B.
“Relocate.”
Provide labor, transportation, materials, tools, appliances and utilities necessary for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Removing installed product from the University's existing facility, as required.
Transportation of product from University's facility to the job site.
Receiving and storage of University furnished, CM/GC installed product, as required.
Providing materials and components for the product as necessary to install in an operating
condition, but not including repairing of existing damages to the product.
Modification of product only as specified under the particular item.
Installation of product in this project, complete and in operating condition, including the
adjusting and calibration of the product as necessary for proper operation.
Testing of product.
Paying of fees, licenses, and taxes in conjunction with the installation of the product.
Roughing-in and final utility connections for the University furnished, CM/GC installed product
remains the work of Sections governing the specific utility.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other Sections to obtain proper installation of
items. Become acquainted with the work of other Sections whose work abuts, adjoins or is in any
way affected by or related to work under this Section.
B.
Carefully examine the drawings and directions and be responsible for proper installation of materials
and product without substantial changes.
C.
Indication of pipe connection sizes on the plans shall in no way relieve CM/GC of the responsibility
of checking and verifying their sizes and locations from the actual product to be installed and any
available roughing-in diagrams.
3.2
PRODUCT INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Locations: The general arrangement of the University Furnished Product is indicated on the
drawings.
B.
Roughing-in: When product is not available prior to the installation schedule, rough-in the utility
service at walls or floors as directed, and leave ready for future connection.
C.
Installations: Install product and material in conformance with manufacturer's directions where
available. Work shall be assembled and installed in harmony with other trades at such times and in
such sequence as acceptable to the University.
3.3
PROTECTION TO PRODUCT AND MATERIALS
A.
Utilities: Close pipe openings with caps or plugs, and protect electrical work as necessary.
B.
Product: Tightly cover and protect product against dirt, water and mechanical or chemical injury.
C.
Damage to University's property due to fault or negligence of the CM/GC shall be repaired or
replaced at no additional expense to the University.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01640 - 2
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS
3.4
REMOVING PRODUCT FROM EXISTING FACILITY
A.
Schedule for removal of product from existing facility shall be coordinated with University's
requirements.
B.
Minimize shut down of existing building operations.
C.
No utilities may be turned off without the University's approval.
D.
Take necessary precaution to protect building and occupants from injury due to work of this Section.
E.
Cover and insulate exposed wires to removed product.
F.
Adequately cover floor openings and flag projections as necessary.
3.5
SCHEDULE OF UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, CM/GC INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Refer to Drawings.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01640 - 3
UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01640 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL - NOT USED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
C.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Refer to Division 1 Section “Project Communications”.
D.
Installation: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing
products in applications indicated.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each
component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the
Work.
a.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components
at heights recommended by industry standards.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01700 - 1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
b.
6.
7.
E.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
Progress Cleaning: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked.
Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
materials specifically recommended.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
Starting and Adjusting: Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
1.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
G.
Protection of Installed Construction: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that
ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
H.
Correction of the Work: Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore
damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
1.
2.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01700 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01710
PROJECT CLARIFICATIONS
A.
The following clarifications shall be considered a part of the work.
B.
PROJECT MANUAL
1.
C.
D.
The Project Manual is the volume issued by the Architect which includes the Conditions of
the Contract, the Special Conditions the Specifications, and may include Bidding
Requirements.
CORRELATION AND INTENT
1.
Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the
specifications.
2.
The Sections included within Division 1 are intended to be extensions to various applicable
Articles in the General Conditions. Any conflicts or contradictions between them shall be
interpreted that the General Conditions shall prevail.
3.
Summary paragraphs placed at the beginning of the Sections present a brief indication of the
principal Work included in that Section, but do not limit Work to subject mentioned nor purport
to itemize Work that may be included.
4.
The Relation of Specifications and Drawings shall be equal authority and priority. Should
they disagree in themselves, or with each other, bids shall be based on the most expensive
combination of quality and quantity of work indicated. The appropriate Work, in the event of
the above mentioned disagreements, shall be determined by the Architect.
5.
Should the Drawings disagree themselves, figures shall govern over scaled measurements,
large scaled Drawings shall govern over small scale Drawings, the greater quantity of work or
materials shall be furnished and performed; the descriptive writings shall govern over legends
indicating material or conditions and the Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract
Documents.
6.
Failure to report a conflict in the Contract Documents shall be deemed evidence that the
CM/GC has elected to proceed in the more expensive manner.
7.
Instructions, directions and requirements as specified shall be considered to be followed by
the phrase "unless otherwise specified or indicated".
INTERPRETATION
1.
In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as
"all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is
absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation
of either statement.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01710 - 1
PROJECT CLARIFICATIONS
E.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
F.
PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION
1.
G.
H.
When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is
required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy
and completeness of such calculations and certifications.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
1.
If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to
persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or
polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the CM/GC, the CM/GC shall,
upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the
condition to the University and Architect in writing.
2.
The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which
certifies that no PCB's or asbestos have been used in the materials for construction of the
Project. This affidavit shall be due at the same time the Release of Lien on products is
furnished to the Architect.
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPONENTS (VOC)
1.
I.
Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action
may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which
certifies that all materials containing Volatile Organic Components (VOC) are in strict
compliance with all VOC (Volatile Organic Components) requirements and regulations of the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA),
State, County, City and Local Air Control District.
HAZARDOUS WASTE
1.
The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which
certifies that all hazardous waste, trash, debris, etc. have been disposed of in a manner
which is in strict compliance with all current requirements of EPA (Environmental Protection
Agency), State, County, City and Local districts or authorities.
END OF DOCUMENT
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01710 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
B.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
1.
C.
If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If
it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized,
experienced, and specialized firm.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1.
2.
B.
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01731 - 1
CUTTING AND PATCHING
C.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
D.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
E.
Performance: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
F.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface
of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings
and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01731 - 2
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial
Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify CM/GC of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify CM/GC of items, either on CM/GC's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
C.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise University of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting University unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and
similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
University. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise University of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to University's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1.
2.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of
the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01770 - 1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
3.
4.
5.
D.
Final Completion Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify CM/GC of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
CM/GC of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
E.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct University's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of
each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by CM/GC that are outside the limits of
construction.
1.
2.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
F.
Project Record Documents: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes.
Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record
Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
G.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of reproducible Contract Drawings and one set of
blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Drawings to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or
entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a.
2.
3.
H.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01770 - 2
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
I.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not
part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification
Sections and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment
descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and
copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind
and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary
to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
Provide 3 copies to the University
Warranties: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280mm) paper.
WARRANTIES: (FDG GR.11.7) Warranties shall be written in the name of “Commonwealth of
Virginia and the Rector and Board of Visitors of the University of Virginia.” Specify
requirement that two copies of each warranty are required in the specified format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Demonstration and Training: Instruct University's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Schedule training with University, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,
and course content.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline.
Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation,
operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01770 - 3
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
B.
Final Cleaning: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
1.
2.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
C.
Remove construction equipment and surplus material from Project site.
Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken transparent materials.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical, electrical and similar equipment. Remove excess
lubrication and foreign substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors.
Replace burned-out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury
vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on University's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
01770 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner’s
designated storage area.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Materials Ownership: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's
property and shall be removed from Project site.
C.
Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
Proposed dust-control and noise-control measures.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective
demolition work, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of
temporary partitions and means of egress.
Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition
operations.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with applicable regulations, codes and ordinances.
E.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
F.
Project Conditions:
1.
2.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less
than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
02 4119 - 1
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
3.
Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
a.
G.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
H.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
I.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Repair Materials: Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1.
2.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
Use materials whose installed performance equal or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
B.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly
submit a written report to Architect.
C.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
D.
Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
E.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, shut off, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition
and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
F.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury
to people and damage to facilities to remain.
G.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust
and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
02 4119 - 2
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
H.
Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of
dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
I.
Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
1.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
J.
Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
K.
Selective Demolition: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, verify condition and contents before starting flame-cutting operations.
Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
L.
Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators,
stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective
demolition operations.
M.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after
selective demolition operations are complete.
N.
Patching and Repairs: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective
demolition operations.
1.
O.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
Disposal of Demolished Materials: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow
demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
1.
2.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
02 4119 - 3
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
02 4119 - 4
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 05 4300
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Slotted channel framing and accessories necessary to complete installation.
DELEGATED ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Contract Documents Design Intent: Drawings and Specifications indicate design intent for products
and systems and do not necessarily indicate or specify total Work required and shall not be
construed as an engineered design. Furnish and install all Work required for a complete installation.
B.
Delegated Engineering Responsibility: Contractor shall employ a qualified professional engineer to
provide engineering for products and systems including attachment to building structure required to
meet design intent of Contract Documents including, but not limited to, the following.
1.
C.
Coordination of Contract Documents and Work:
1.
2.
1.3
Preparation of structural analysis data including engineering calculations, shop drawings and
other submittals signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
Product Variations: In the event of minor differences between products and systems of
acceptable or available manufacturer/fabricators, Contractor shall notify Architect of such
differences and resolve conflicts in a timely manner. Failure of Contractor to provide
notification shall be construed as acceptance of conditions indicated, and changes caused by
minor differences between products and Contract Documents shall be included in the Work
at no additional cost to Owner.
Allowable Adjustments: Minor dimension and profile adjustments may be made in interest of
fabrication or erection methods or techniques or ability to satisfy design intent, provided
design intent is maintained as determined by Architect. Proposed deviations shall include a
detailed analysis of impact to adjacent substrates or other building systems, including related
design or construction cost impacts. If accepted by Architect, deviations causing changes in
materials, constructability, substrates, or conditions shall be included in the Work at no
additional cost to Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
B.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation
instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 1
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS
assembled work. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, and connection details.
Materials, sizes, spacings, and thicknesses.
Specifics for equipment being supported by framing.
Adjacent building structure, mechanical and electrical elements.
Details for anchoring and attachment to building structure.
C.
Delegated Engineering Calculations: Informational submittal for products indicated to comply with
design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation; test reports are not acceptable substitute for calculations.
D.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer/fabricator, installer, and professional engineer.
1.
2.
1.4
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production
capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times
specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type
and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer/Fabricator Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or
acceptable to manufacturer/fabricator to install products.
Delegated Engineering Professional Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of
kind indicated that have resulted in installation of products and systems similar to this Project and
has a record of successful in-service performance.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 2
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS
1.5
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
1.6
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor, including superintendent.
Installer, including project manager and supervisor.
Manufacturer/fabricator’s qualified technical representative.
Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review Work requirements (Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents).
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the
manufacturer/fabricator’s specifications.
Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements
reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements
exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set
date for reconvening conference.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 3
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
Horizontal Spanning Members; Upper, Lower and Main Subrails:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Vertical Columns:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; MQ-41 channels
Hilti; BTS 22 channels
Unistrut Corp.; P1000 channels
Inside Vertical Columns:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; MQ-41 channels
Hilti; BTS 22TH struts
Unistrut Corp.; P9200 tubes
Diagonal and Horizontal Bracing:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; MQ-124X channels
Hilti; B12A channels
Unistrut Corp.; P5501 channels
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; MQ-41 channels
Hilti; BTS 22TH struts
Unistrut Corp.; P1000 H3 channels
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
2.3
Equipment Support: Framing consisting of necessary slotted channel framing members such as
beams, columns, braces, fittings, spanning members, longitudinal rails, track supports, and
components such as channel connectors, nuts, bolts, washers, shim plates, and general hardware,
for a complete and properly functioning support structure for equipment.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Requirements: Engineer slotted channel framing according to delegated engineering
quality standards to withstand live and dead loads according to authorities having jurisdiction,
applicable local building codes, and information indicated within limits and under conditions
indicated, without material failure or permanent deformation of structural members.
1.
2.
Structural Movement: Engineer to withstand movements of structure including, but not limited
to, drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep; accommodate 3/8 in (9.5 mm) differential
vertical deflection of floors
Design Loads: As required by scheduled equipment.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 4
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS
3.
4.
5.
Deflection: L/720 of span in either plane (vertical or horizontal) when maximum loading
conditions is applied on either rail, due to equipment operation, including positioning of
equipment at extremities of its travel.
Seismic Loads: Engineer to withstand effects of earthquake motions.
Design Criteria:
a.
b.
B.
2.4
Equipment Information: Coordinate engineering with information provided by
manufacturer of equipment being supported.
Minimum Factor of Safety: 2 based on ultimate strength under static loading
conditions.
Delegated Engineering Quality Standards: Determine allowable working stresses of materials
according to authorities having jurisdiction, applicable local building codes, framing manufacturers
design data, MFMA-4, and MFMA-103.
FRAMING MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Slotted Channels:
1.
2.
Product Quality Standard: MFMA-4.
Interior Locations: C-shape channels fabricated from ASTM A 1011 Grade 33 cold-rolled
steel sheet or ASTM A 1008 Grade 33 for hot-rolled steel sheet, structural classification; with
continuous open slot formed by inturned serrated or unserrated lips, and intermediate slots in
back of channel; riveted back-to-back type for primary horizontal framing members; wall
thickness as required by engineering design.
a.
3.
Painted Factory Finish: Chemically cleaned, phosphated, electro deposited acrylic or
electrostatically-applied polyester finished, then baked; resisting minimum 300 hours of
salt spray exposure according to ASTM B 117.
Profile Size: 1-5/8 in (40 mm) wide by depth required by delegated engineering.
B.
Channel Connectors: Standard 2 part connectors of type, size and material required by delegated
engineering; fabricated from carbon steel with nuts and threaded bolts; with or without springs;
electro-galvanized finish; from same manufacturer as slotted channels.
C.
General Hardware: Standard fittings, bases, brackets, and clamps of three-dimensional shape
suitable for condition and type, size and material required by delegated engineering; fabricated from
carbon steel; same finish as slotted channels; from same manufacturer as slotted channels.
D.
Fasteners to Building Structure: Welding rods and expansion anchors as specified in Division 05
Section “Structural Steel Framing” and "Metal Fabrications".
E.
PVC Closure Strip: Paintable PVC closure strip; Unistrut Corp; P1184P, grey color.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 5
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
MFMA-103.
Respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
A.
3.4
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which
would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
INSTALLATION
A.
Erection:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
C.
Install slotted channel framing members and components square, true to line, level and
plumb; and securely in place to properly support schedule equipment.
Cut slotted channels with powered cutting saws; flame-cutting is not permitted.
Tighten all connections to torque required by engineering design
Horizontal Mounting Surfaces: Align within 1/32 in (0.8 mm) in 24 in (600 mm) and within
1/16 in (1.5 mm) in 18 ft (5.4 m).
Elevation Between Rails: Difference between 2 rails within 1/16 in (1.5 mm) in 24 in
(600 mm).
PVC Closure Strips: Install at all exposed rails.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
05 4300 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes through penetration firestopping systems for openings and penetrations
through smoke and fire-resistance-rated assemblies, and supplementary items necessary to
complete their installation.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
B.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestopping systems with F-ratings determined
per ASTM E 814, equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestopping
systems with T-ratings, as well as F-ratings, determined per ASTM E 814, where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable
floor areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.3
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
Penetrating items larger than 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall crosssectional area.
For through-penetration firestopping systems exposed to view, provide products with flamespread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of firestopping system product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, show each kind of construction condition
penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include
firestopping design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction and
penetrating items.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 1
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
2.
Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration to suit a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications
marked, approved by firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of firestopping system products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
D.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating firestopping system complies
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed firestopping systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestopping systems, for each kind of
penetration and construction condition required, from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
1.
2.
D.
1.5
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency performing
testing and follow-up inspection services for firestopping systems acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestopping systems: Provide materials that are identical to those
tested per ASTM E 814.
Provide rated firestopping system products that bear
classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping systems
are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
firestopping systems.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 2
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturer is “acceptable” if firestopping system has been tested
and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and manufacturer can evidence product compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Compatibility: Provide firestopping systems that are compatible with one another, with the
substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating firestopping systems, under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping system manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C.
Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components
specified by firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and
inspecting agency for firestopping systems indicated.
2.2
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Classified in Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, "Section
XHEZ - Through Penetration Firestop Systems", and/or "Section XHHW - Fill Void or Cavity
Materials" for specific project conditions.
B.
Application Considerations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Firestops exposed to view and/or are scheduled to receive finishes shall be paintable or
capable of receiving finish materials.
Firestops exposed to traffic, moisture, and physical damage shall be products that do not
deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
Firestops for water piping penetrations, of any type, shall be moisture-resistant products.
Firestops for floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width
and exposed to possible loading and traffic shall be products capable of supporting the
floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
Firestops for penetrations involving insulated piping shall be products that do not require
removal of insulation.
a.
Firestops for cable trays and future penetrations shall be reusable pillows or bags.
C.
Provide firestops within fire resistive walls and partitions containing flush mounted devices such
as outlet boxes, electrical cabinets and mechanical cabinets mounted back to back and spaced
less than 24 inches on center in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory “Wall Opening
Protective Materials”, Category CLIV.
D.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration
firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 3
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrate surfaces to receive firestopping systems and associated work and conditions
under which work will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting of work within a particular area will
be construed as installers acceptance of surface conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to
comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove foreign materials from surfaces of openings, joints and penetrating items that
could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A.
General:
Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article and the
through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to
products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop
systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C.
Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
1.
2.
3.
Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories,
and penetrating items.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 4
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping system
products and of products in which opening and joints occur.
B.
Protect firestopping system components during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other
causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 5
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8413 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 07 8446
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes firestopping systems for joints at perimeter and through smoke and fireresistance-rated assemblies, and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which firestopping systems are installed.
B.
Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide systems for sealing linear joints in fire resistive rated
assemblies that has ratings with movement capabilities equaling or exceeding the fire
resistance rating of construction which joint occurs, as determined by UL 2079 or ASTM E
1966.
C.
Expansion and Contraction: Perimeter fire containment systems shall accommodate movement
of the exterior wall due to thermal expansion and contraction.
D.
For firestopping systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less
than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of firestopping system product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, show each kind of construction condition and
relationships to adjoining construction. Include firestopping design designation of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with
requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for each type
construction.
Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration to suit a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications
marked, approved by firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of firestopping system products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 1
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
D.
1.4
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating firestopping system complies
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed firestopping systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain firestopping systems, for each kind of construction condition
required, from a single manufacturer.
C.
Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Manufacturer of fire stopping material shall be responsible
for testing samples of materials that will contact or affect firestopping materials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of fill
materials to joint substrates.
Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during
installation.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written
instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency performing
testing and follow-up inspection services for firestopping systems acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire Resistive Joint System: Provide materials that are identical to those tested according
to UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. Products shall have a flame spread rating of less than 25.
a.
1.5
Where UL-classified fire-resistive joint systems are indicated, they refer to
alphanumeric designations listed in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” under product
Category XHBN.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings to ensure that firestopping systems are installed according
to specified requirements.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 2
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturer is “acceptable” if firestopping system has been tested
and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and manufacturer can evidence product compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Compatibility: Provide firestopping systems that are compatible with one another and the
substrates forming openings, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
firestopping system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components
specified by firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and
inspecting agency for firestopping systems indicated.
2.2
TOP-OF-WALL JOINT FIRESTOPPING
A.
Safing Insulation: Semi rigid board insulation produced by combining slag-wool fibers with
thermosetting resin binders and complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
ASTM C 612, Type 1A and 1B.
Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft.
ASTM E119 Fire rating indicated, but not less than 2 hours.
B.
Coating Material: Manufacturers standard fill material or spray applied product for sealing
surface of safing insulation and adjacent construction against penetration of fire and smoke.
C.
Fire Resistive Sealants: Intumescent single-component, water based, high solids, elastomeric
sealants. Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
nonslumping, gunnable sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrate surfaces to receive firestopping systems and associated work and conditions
under which work will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting of work within a particular area will
be construed as installers acceptance of surface conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with
recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1.
Remove foreign materials from surfaces of joints that could interfere with adhesion of
firestopping.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 3
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
2.
3.
Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install fire-stopping systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and firestopping system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications
indicated.
B.
Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C.
Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and
drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.
B.
Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to
produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C.
Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting
joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing
uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant
movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D.
Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or
curing begin. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce
fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use
tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 4
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
3.5
INSTALLATION OF FIRE SAFING PROTECTION
A.
Top of Wall: Install safing insulation to fill gap between top of wall and floor slab above. Cut
safing insulation 50 percent wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit.
B.
Install coating material or smoke seal compound to cover fill material and seal opening.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping system
products and of products in which joints occur.
B.
Protect firestopping system components during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other
causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 5
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 8446 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Joint sealants, backing materials, and supplementary items necessary for
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation
instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Where specified to provide sealant colors from manufacturer's
standard and custom selections, provide manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification Purposes: Samples for each kind and color of joint sealants in 1/2 in (12
mm) wide joints formed between two 6 in (150 mm) long strips of material matching appearance of
exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.
1.
2.
1.3
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive Submittal of Qualification Data for available manufacturers listed in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
Experience: Installer with not less than 10 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with sufficient production
capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project site during
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 1
JOINT SEALANTS
3.
1.4
times specified Work is in progress that is experienced in installing systems similar to type
and scope required.
Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to
manufacturer to install products.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.5
Ambient Conditions: Install joint sealants within range of ambient and substrate temperatures and
moisture conditions as recommended by manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental
conditions that affect performance.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
2.2
Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B.
Compatibility: Joint sealants, backings, and other related materials shall be compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and primers for use
inside weatherproofing system shall comply with following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Elastomeric Sealants: 250 g/L.
Primers for Non-Porous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
INTERIOR ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant:
1.
2.
Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, silicone sealant specially
formulated with fungicide for use in sanitary non-porous applications.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 2
JOINT SEALANTS
3.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
B.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard and custom colors.
Interior Non-sag Urethane Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 or 35.
Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, non-staining as determined by preconstruction stain testing if exposed, polyurethane sealant.
Joint Movement Capability: Plus 25 percent, minus 25 percent, or plus 35 percent, minus 35
percent.
Primers: Product provided by sealant manufacturer if required by conditions.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
6.
C.
3.
4.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and custom colors.
Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 834, Type and Grade as required by conditions.
Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, general purpose, paintable,
siliconized acrylic latex sealant.
Joint Movement Capability: Plus 7.5 percent, minus 7.5 percent
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
5.
BASF; Sonolac.
Pecora Corp.; AC 20+.
Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremflex 834.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard and custom colors.
Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler:
1.
2.
3.
Description: Low pressure, one-component, expanding, closed-cell polyurethane insulating
foam gap filler; applied with professional hand-held dispensing gun; CFC and HCFC free.
Performance Requirements: Class 1 Fire-Retardant per ASTM E 84.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
BASF; Sonolastic NP 1.
Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol I-XL.
Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Dymonic or Vulkem 116.
Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant:
1.
2.
D.
BASF; Omniplus.
Dow Corning; 786 Silicone Sealant.
Momentive Performance Materials, GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
Pecora Corp.; 898.
Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremsil 200.
Convenience Products; Touch ‘n Seal.
Dow Chemical Co.; Great Stuff Pro.
Fomo Products, Inc.; Handi-Foam.
RHH Foam Systems, Inc.; Versi-Tite
Acoustical Sealants: As specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 3
JOINT SEALANTS
F.
2.4
Fire Resistive Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section “Fire Resistive Joint Firestopping”.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
Foam Backer Rods:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.5
Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 1330, Type C, Type O, Type B.
Description: Extruded polyethylene, polyurethane, or polyolefin in either closed cell structure
(Type C), open cell structure (Type O), or bicellular structure with surface skin (Type B) as
defined by ASTM Terminology C 717.
Size: Diameter approximately 25 percent larger than joint width, unless otherwise directed by
manufacturer.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials, or joint surfaces at back
of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
B.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrate surfaces to receive products and
systems and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as
acceptance of surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
A.
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which
would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 4
JOINT SEALANTS
B.
Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint backings and sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove foreign material that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including, but not
limited to, dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean non-porous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
Substrate material allowed by sealant’s ASTM C 920 Use Classification.
C.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer, or as
indicated by prior experience, or as required by pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
D.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Joint Sealant Backings: Install type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet or damaged before sealant
application and replace with dry materials.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
Joint Sealants: Install at same time as backings using proven techniques that comply with following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Use open cell backer rod at interior line of sealant for double sealed condition.
Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants
according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
a.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 5
JOINT SEALANTS
b.
c.
6.
Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 as applicable to materials,
applications, conditions indicated, and with the following profile configurations:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Fillet: Figure 5.
Bridge: Figure 6.
Butt: Figure 8A (concave tooling), generally hour-glass shape with 2:1 width-to-depth
ratio.
Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler: Apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler within exterior wall
assemblies using professional hand-held dispensing gun in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.5
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Prior to installation of wall finish systems, apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler to gaps,
cracks, cavities, openings, and voids in exterior wall back-up, including annular space around
piping, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets to seal off potential air drafts.
After sprayed foam sealant is applied, make flush with face of adjacent wall by using method
recommended by manufacturer.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
In-Progress Cleaning: Remove excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
3.7
General Requirements: Protect during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are
without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original Work.
JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Interior Elastomeric Sealant Applications:
1.
Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant:
a.
b.
2.
Non-moving joints in moist or damp areas which are susceptible to mildew.
Non-moving joints in toilet rooms.
Interior Non-sag Urethane Sealant:
a.
Building joints on interior side of exterior walls where joint movement is anticipated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 6
JOINT SEALANTS
3.
Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant:
a.
b.
B.
Non-moving joints where another type of sealant is not otherwise specified or
scheduled.
Minimal moving joints due to temperature change.
Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler Applications:
1.
Interior non-moving gaps around windows, glazed aluminum walls, doors, and penetrations.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 7
JOINT SEALANTS
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
07 9200 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 08 1114
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Interior custom hollow metal frames and supplementary items necessary for
installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Custom Hollow Metal Work:
HMMA 861.
B.
Interior: Areas located in conditioned spaces.
1.3
Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details,
installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and
field-assembled work.
C.
Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm) samples to
demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
1.
Frames: Show profile, head-to-jamb corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers.
Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable.
D.
Frame Schedule: Schedule prepared by or under supervision of supplier, using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door and hardware
schedules.
E.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 1
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.
1.
1.4
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with
successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of
successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5
years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required
Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
1.5
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production
capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during
times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar
to type and scope required for Project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 in (100 mm) high wood
blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other
construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 2
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of
allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without
permanent deformation or failure of materials.
B.
Fire-Rated Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
C.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or
UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
D.
Smoke-Control Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with UL 1784.
2.3
COMPONENT MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, Designation CS (Commercial Steel),
Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Frame Anchors:
ASTM A 591 / A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
C.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Device type and size required, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153 / A 153M, Class B.
D.
Fasteners into Concrete:
1.
2.
E.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low
velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosionresistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching frames into concrete
substrate.
Post-Tensioned Concrete: For post-tensioned concrete, fasteners shall not exceed 1 in
(25 mm) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed
fasteners in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation for Installations in Sound-Rated Partitions: ASTM C 665, Type I
(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool
with 6 to 12 lb/cu ft (96 to 192 kg/cu m) density; with following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 maximum.
Smoke Development Index: 50 maximum.
Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 3
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
F.
Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing".
G.
Primer: Fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead and chromate free, universal primer complying
with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint
system specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Fabrication Quality Standard: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
B.
General Requirements: Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness
of metal. Where practical, fit, and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
C.
Accessories: Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from
cold-rolled steel sheet.
D.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to templates
furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Locate hardware according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
Reinforce frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for
preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
Fabrication Provisions:
1.
2.
Fabricate frames of construction indicated below.
Close contact edges of corner joints tight with faces mitered and full-profile continuously
welded.
a.
3.
4.
B.
“Knock-down” frame construction is not acceptable and shall not be used.
Close contact edges of stops butted or mitered.
Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide
alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
Joinery:
1.
Fabrication Quality Standard: Head-to-jamb joints according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA
820 for either of following fabrication techniques with:
a.
b.
2.
Saw-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded.
Machine-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded.
Externally or internally weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and seamless.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 4
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
3.
4.
C.
Internally weld rabbet and soffits continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth.
Use of gusset or splice plates as substitute for fully welding is not permitted.
Materials and Thickness:
1.
Frames for Interior Openings:
thicknesses:
a.
b.
2.
3.
D.
48 in (1200 mm) Wide or Less: 0.053 in (1.3 mm) (16 gage) thick.
More Than 48 in (1200 mm) Wide: 0.067 in (1.7 mm) (14 gage) thick.
Sidelight and Transom Frames: Closed tubular members with no visible face seams or
joints fabricated from same type and thickness of material as adjacent door frame.
Interior Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricated from 0.053 in (1.3 mm) (16 gage) thick coldrolled steel sheet.
Stops and Moldings:
1.
2.
Form corners with butted or mitered hairline joints.
Provide around glazed lites where indicated.
a.
b.
3.
E.
Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of following
Fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames.
Loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work so that glass can be
removed independently.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
of installation indicated.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of steel
reinforcing plates for following hardware:
1.
2.
3.
Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 in (4.2 mm) (7 gage) thick by 1-1/2 in wide by 6 in (38 mm by
150 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage).
Surface-Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage).
F.
Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage) thick, steel channel or
angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 in (1200 mm).
G.
Lead-Lined Door Frames: Comply with standard frame requirements, except 0.067 in (1.7 mm)
(14 gage) thick, and lined with lead sheet of thickness not less than required for adjacent walls.
1.
2.
Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry weight of
lead-lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before installing lead lining.
Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across head,
lapping stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. Fabricate
lead lining wide enough to maintain effective lap with lead in adjacent walls.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 5
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
H.
Lead-Lined Window (Observation) Frames: Fabricate from 0.043-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, formedsteel sheet or 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick aluminum extrusions with mitered corners, welded or
bolted with concealed fasteners.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across
head and sill, lapping the stops, and fabricated wide enough to maintain an effective lap
with lead of adjoining assemblies.
Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing material perimeter by at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
and provide removable stops.
Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to make
opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all points and in all
directions.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Types: Fabricated of same material as frame:
a.
b.
2.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
0.042 in (1.10 mm) (18 gage) thick.
Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Countersunk,
flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts with expansion shields or inserts,
minimum 3/8 in (10 mm) diameter bolts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Quantity and Location:
a.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 in (450 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 in (800 mm) on centers and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
J.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Locate anchors
not more than 6 in (150 mm) from top and bottom of frame and not more than 26 in
(650 mm) on centers.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames welded to bottom of jambs and mullions
with not less than 4 spot welds, not less than 0.0428 in (1.10 mm) (18 gage) thick, and as
follows, terminating bottom of frames at finish floor surface:
1.
2.
K.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 in (1500 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 in (1500 to 2250 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 in (2250 to 2400 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 in
(600 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 in (2400 mm) high.
Two anchors per head for frames above 42 in (1050 mm) wide and mounted
in metal-stud partitions.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2 in (50 mm) height adjustment.
Shipping Spreader Bars: Attach two removable metal spreader bars across bottom of frames,
tack welded to jambs and mullions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 6
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
L.
Door Silencers: Drill holes to receive door silencers furnished under Division 08 Section “Door
Hardware”. Keep holes clear during construction.
1.
2.
2.6
Single-Door Frames: Strike jamb for 3 door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Head jamb for 2 door silencers.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming, and when specified, finishing.
B.
Finish products specified in this Section after fabrication.
C.
Non-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove
mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning".
D.
Prime Coat Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer specified below immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment.
1.
E.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems
and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as
acceptance of surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 840.
NFPA 80 for fire-rated frames.
NFPA 105 for smoke control frames.
DHI A115.IG.
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 7
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors
which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in
Work.
B.
Pre-Installation Tolerances: Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace hollow metal frames
for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
Hardware Preparation: Drill and tap frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.
1.
Setting: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces and welded-in shipping spreader bars. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling,
and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with post-installed expansion anchors or powder actuated fasteners.
Sound-Rated Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
In-Place Masonry or Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 8
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
6.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
plumb to following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Glazing:
1.
2.
3.5
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing".
Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 6 in (150 mm) on center and not more than 2 in (50 mm) on centers from each
corner.
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective hollow metal work, including work that is
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of primer compatible with paint specified in Division 09 Section
“Painting”.
C.
Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 9
INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1114 - 10
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 08 1416
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Flush wood doors and accessories necessary to complete installation
including, but not limited to, following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Solid-core doors with faces indicated.
Factory finishing.
Factory fitting to frames and factory machining for hardware.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and
field-assembled work. Provide dimensioned drawings indicating location, size, and hand of
each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data;
location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details,
installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
Include details of core and edge construction, light frames, and trim for openings.
Include factory-finishing specifications.
Include manufacturer’s surface preparation instructions.
Indicate scheduled fire doors that cannot qualify for labeling because of design, size,
hardware or other reason.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for door face matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection-ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
1.
Wood Veneer Door Faces: Full range of colors available.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 1
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
D.
Samples for Verification Purposes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
Wood Veneer Doors: Wood veneer factory finishes applied to actual door face materials,
approximately 8 in by 10 in (200 mm by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each
wood species and transparent finish, provide set of 3 samples showing typical range of
color and grain to be expected in finished work.
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 in by 10 in (200 mm by 250 mm), with door
faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a.
b.
Wood Veneer Doors: Samples for each species of wood veneer and solid lumber
required.
Finish door facing samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
E.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
1.
2.
G.
Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1.
H.
1.3
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in
this Section.
Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating
obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with
successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of
successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10
years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required
Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standards and manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Package doors individually.
Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 2
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Environmental Limitations: Deliver and install doors only when spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by
an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials
and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by
manufacture or design and installation of product. Warranty shall also include finishing that may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. “Defects” is defined to include but
not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1.
Defects include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Warping (Bow, Cup, or Twist): Not more than 1/4 in (6 mm) in a 42 by 84 in (1050
by 2100 mm) section.
Telegraphing of Core Construction: Not more than 0.01 in in a 3 in (0.25 mm in a
75 mm) span in face veneers.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and
labor Defects for a period as follows:
a.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as
judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite Company.
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
VT Industries Inc.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 3
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Fire Resistance Ratings: Products and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire
resistance according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and included under Category GSZN,
Category A, published in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory";
or listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Positive Pressure Testing: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace
shall be established at 40 in (1000 mm) or less above sill.
Availability: If specified as fire-rated and labeled door can be obtained from one
manufacturer, no consideration will be given to those manufacturers who are not
authorized to manufacture such doors.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with UL 1784. Installation shall comply with
NFPA 105 (per VUSBC Section 715.4.3.1).
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Product Quality Standard: In addition to standard listed elsewhere, comply with following,
unless otherwise specified, for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements:
1.
Standard:
a.
b.
B.
Particleboard Core Doors:
1.
2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
Blocking: Solid wood blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware and as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards”.
WI’s “Manual of Millwork”.
Top Rail: 5 in (125 mm).
Bottom Rail: 5 in (125 mm).
Mid Rail: 5 in (125 mm), in doors indicated to have exit devices.
Lock Blocks: 5 in by 10 in (125 mm by 250 mm), one for lock and two for exit
devices.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Mineral core as required for fire-protection-rating indicated.
1.
2.
Edge: Construction with intumescent seals; where positive pressure fire testing is
required, edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching
door face material and laminated backing at hinge stiles for improved screw-holding
capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without
formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 4
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
D.
Mineral Core Doors:
1.
2.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection-rating indicated.
Blocking: Composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in
doors of fire-protection-ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware
and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Solid-core, 5 ply flush bonded core construction with one or more
continuous lead sheets to make up total lead thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Top Rail: 5 in (125 mm).
Bottom Rail: 5 in (125 mm).
Mid Rail: 5 in (125 mm), in doors indicated to have exit devices.
Lock Blocks: 5 in by 10 in (125 mm by 250 mm), one for lock and two for exit
devices.
Core: Solid glued wood block or solid particleboard, glued to top and bottom rails and
edge stiles. Lead lining may be constructed in the core or between the core and faces, at
manufacturer’s option.
Lead Lining: Extend lead sheet continuously from top to bottom and edge to edge.
Assemble lead lining and core with poured lead fasteners or steel bolts. Space lead
fasteners not more than 1-1/2 in (38 mm) from door edge and approximately 8 in
(200 mm) on center. Countersink bolt heads and cover with poured lead.
Lead Thickness: Same as specified for walls in Division 13 Section “Radiation
Protection”.
Shield cutouts for locksets with sheet lead of the same thickness used in door. Lap lining
of cutouts with the door lining.
Provide lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors.
20 minute UL- or Warnock Hersey-labeled, where scheduled.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid Core Doors:
1.
2.
Grade: Premium, with Grade AA wood veneer faces.
Species and Cut Selection: Rift cut red oak.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book or Slip match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance or Center-Balance match
Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.
Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by not less
than 20 ft (6 m) or more.
Pair and Set Match: For doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
Exposed Vertical Edges: AWI 1300-T-7 #5 Edge, same wood veneer as face veneer with
sanded eased edges.
Horizontal Edges: Unfaced, sanded smooth, then apply seal coat.
Core: Particleboard or mineral core as required by application.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 5
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
6.
Construction: 5 plies.
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Stiles and rails bonded to core.
Entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
Faces bonded to core using a hot press.
FABRICATION OF PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A.
Fabrication Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, comply with following,
unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
DHI-WDHS-3 and DHI A115-W series standards for hardware.
AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.”
Approved submittals.
Contract Documents.
Factory Fitting: Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated according to installation
quality standards. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits permitted for fire rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting
and machining with seal coat.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Bevel: 1/8 in in 2 in (3 mm in 50 mm) (3-1/2 deg) at lock and hinge edges; at fire rated
doors trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Head, Jambs, and Between Pairs of Doors: 1/8 in (3 mm).
Bottom to Top of Floor Coverings: 1/2 in (12 mm.
Bottom to Top of Raised Threshold: 3/8 in (10 mm).
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied according to installation
quality standards.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
Provide built-in 1/4 in (6 mm) diameter raceway through doors, from lockset location to
nearest hinge location, for low voltage wiring for doors scheduled to have electric locks.
FACTORY FINISHING DOORS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that
is not surface applied, before finishing.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on edges of cutouts and mortises.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 6
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
C.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors for Transparent Finish:
1.
Finish: As follows:
a.
b.
Grade: Premium.
Product Quality Standard Finish Designation:
1)
2)
c.
d.
e.
AWI conversion varnish system.
WI System 4 clear conversion varnish system.
Staining: Refer to the drawings.
Effect: Open-grain finish.
Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive flush wood doors and
associated work to which flush wood doors will be applied for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a
particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
NFPA 105 (per VUSBC Section 715.4.3.1) for smoke control doors.
AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.”
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Approved submittals.
Contract Documents.
B.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
C.
Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.”
D.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 7
PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 1416 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 08 3113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Access doors and frames and supplementary items necessary for installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation
instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and fieldassembled work.
C.
Ceiling Coordination Drawings for Access Doors at Ceilings: Furnish reflected ceiling plans, drawn
to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other.
Indicate method of attaching door frames to surrounding construction.
D.
Samples for Verification Purposes: For each door face material, at least 3 in by 5 in (75 mm by 125
mm) in size, in specified finish.
E.
Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including
types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
F.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
G.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
1.
2.
H.
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive Submittal of Qualification Data for available manufacturers listed in this
Section.
Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access
door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method
and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may
vary slightly from sizes indicated.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
B.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in
"Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as
judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Acudor Products, Inc.
Babcock-Davis.
Dur-Red Products.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Maxam Metal Products, Ltd.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
Williams Brothers Corporation of America.
Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems
specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent
characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of
Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 2
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 / A 36M.
1.
2.
ASTM A 123 / A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153 / A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M,
Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
D.
2.4
Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning", to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning", or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling".
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299 in (0.7 mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Non-rated Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.075 in (1.9 mm) thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish
surfaces.
Frame: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder.
Size: 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm); unless otherwise indicated.
Product Selection: Provide the following or a comparable product from another available
manufacturer;
a.
B.
Nystrom Building Products, Model NW.
Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 1-1/2 hours.
Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.
Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 in (0.9 mm).
Frame: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 3
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
8.
9.
10.
Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release.
Size: 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm); unless otherwise indicated.
Product Selection: Provide the following or a comparable product from another available
manufacturer;
a.
2.5
Nystrom Building Products, Model IW.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with
smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Gypsum Board Locations: For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for
gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1.
2.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 4
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects or errors which would result in
poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B.
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door
installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of
supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
3.5
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
3.6
ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULE
A.
Provide access doors where indicated on the drawings and as follows:
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Access Doors:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Concealed valves and controls for plumbing and HVAC.
Fire dampers above non-accessible ceilings.
Motor operated doors and grilles above non-accessible ceilings.
Fire-Rated Steel Access Doors:
a.
Rated walls and ceilings.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 5
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 3113 - 6
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Items commercially known as finish or door hardware required for operation
of doors, and accessories necessary to complete installation.
B.
Products not installed under this Section: Coordinating and scheduling remain requirements of
this Section
1.
1.2
Cylinders and cores for all locks are to be furnished and installed by the Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each item of door hardware indicated,
specified, or required.
1.
2.
B.
Including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
finishes, and installation instructions.
Index product data sheets according to hardware schedule by use of numbers or letters,
or combination.
Shop Drawings for Electrified Hardware:
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Indicate power, signal, and control wiring detailed in following forms
distinguishing between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
System schematic.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams.
Riser diagrams.
Door elevations.
Interface: Details between electrified hardware and fire alarm and security system.
Sequence of Operation: Narrative operation description of doors controlled by electrified
hardware.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
C.
Hardware Set Schedules: Prepared by suppliers AHC detailing fabrications and assembly of
door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate hardware sets with doors,
frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of item.
1.
Format: Use same numbering shown on Drawings and Schedules.
a.
Content: Organize into hardware sets indicating designations of each item
required for each door or opening. Include following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
2.
Type, style, function, size, and finish of each item.
Manufacturer and product number of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent attachment information.
Location of each set cross referenced to room name and number in which
door serves.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Additional Specific Information: Include type of strike plates; length of spindle,
hand, backset and bevel of locks; hand and degree opening for closers; length of
kickplates; length of rods for flush bolts; type of door stop; and other functions of
mechanisms.
Keying Schedule: By Owner.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required
by Division 01, submit manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of installed
Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under
anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be
detrimental to finishes and performance.
E.
Operational and Maintenance Training: Training materials, including instructor qualifications,
required by Close-Out Activities Article.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier Qualifications:
1.
2.
Experience: Architectural door hardware supplier that has record of successful in-service
performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that
indicated for this Project.
Staff Hardware Expertise: Experienced professional currently certified by DHI as AHC,
CDC, and EHC, and experienced in door hardware installations that are comparable in
material, design, and extent to this Project that will be responsible for following activities:
a.
b.
c.
Preparation of submittals, including hardware set schedules.
Available for consultation to Owner, Architect, and Contractor during course of
Work.
Finalizing keying requirements with Owner.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 2
DOOR HARDWARE
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
Experience: Company with experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of
this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and sufficient capability,
facilities and personnel, to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during
times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar
to type and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer Training: Technical representatives of manufacturer of locksets, exit
devices and closers shall train Installer’s installation personnel (supervisor and installers),
either at Project or at manufacturers facility, on following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Proper installation of products.
Proper sequence of installation of Work.
Situations that require special attention or care during installation.
Situations and conditions that should be avoided.
Other topics relevant to installation.
C.
Manufacturers Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services
department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations,
evaluations, and problem diagnostics. Sales representatives are not acceptable.
D.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at
Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor, including supervisor.
Supplier’s architectural hardware consultant.
Hardware installer, including supervisor.
Owner’s Security installer, including supervisor.
Manufacturer’s technical representative.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of Work required by
reviewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Tour representative areas of required Work, discuss and evaluate for compliance
with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations,
sequence of installation and other preparatory Work performed by other installers.
Review Contract Document requirements.
Review approved submittals.
Review installation procedures, including, but not limited to, following:
1)
2)
3)
Installation requirements for each hardware item.
Sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware
Relationships between electrified hardware and fire alarm and security
system.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
e.
f.
3.
1.4
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish
copy of record to each party attending.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Furnish labor and material warranty for following time periods
from date of substantial completion agreeing to repair or replace defects, faulty Work and
failures, signed by authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mortise Locksets: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical
components.
Exit Devices: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components.
Overhead Manual Closers: 10 years.
Electrified Hardware: 2 years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers and Products: Provide product by one of manufacturers listed below.
HARDWARE, GENERAL
A.
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of hardware unit from single manufacturer.
Electrified door hardware shall be from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and are listed
by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
B.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: Hardware units shall not have manufacturer's name or trade name
displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rated labels;
manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
C.
Base Metals: Hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a
quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do
not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified
standard.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 4
DOOR HARDWARE
D.
Fasteners: Hardware units manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match
surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Concealed Fasteners: Hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for
units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation
where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is only means of securely
attaching hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame
construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For following fire rated applications:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Steel Through Bolts:
provided:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
E.
Mortise hinges to doors.
Strike plates to frames.
Closers to doors and frames.
For following fire rated applications unless door blocking is
Surface hinges to doors.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.2.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
2.
Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be
established at 40 in (1,000 mm) or less above sill.
F.
Accessibility Requirements: Hardware units and installation shall comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A 117.1, and state and local accessibility standards.
G.
Electrical Requirements: Furnish electrical products that are listed and classified by UL as
suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.
2.3
Electrified Functions: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and
continuous through hinge knuckle.
BUTT HINGES
A.
Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.1, Grade 1.
B.
Description:
1.
Generic Type: Full-mortise, concealed bearings.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 5
DOOR HARDWARE
2.
Weight:
a.
b.
3.
Doors with Closers: Heavy anti-friction bearing.
Doors without Closers: Standard plain bearing.
Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, hinge pins as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud.
Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud.
Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
Top Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where
hospital tip (HT) indicated.
Bottom Tips: Hole in bottom for easy pin removal.
C.
Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and wood
frames, provide only template-produced units.
D.
Screws: Phillips flat-head screws with heads to match surface of hinges.
1.
2.
3.
Metal Doors and Metal Frames: Machine screws installed into drilled and tapped holes.
Wood Doors and Wood Frames: Wood screws.
Fire Rated Wood Doors: No. 12 by 1-1/4 in (32 mm), threaded-to-head steel wood
screws.
E.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Hager Companies (HAG); BB1168
McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK); T4A3786
Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of The Stanley Works (STH); FBB168
PIVOTS
A.
Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1.
B.
Description: Full-mortise, single-acting or double-acting, center or offset, mounting, fire rated
when required, lead-lined when required.
1.
2.
3.
Top Pivot: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze bearing.
Standard Intermediate Pivot: Oil-impregnated bronze bearing.
Bottom Pivot: Thrust ball or needle bearing.
C.
Templates: Except for pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames,
provide only template-produced units.
D.
Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
1.
2.
3.
Metal Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
Wood Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head wood screws.
Fire Rated Wood Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head threaded-to-head steel wood
screws.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 6
DOOR HARDWARE
E.
Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets"
Article.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE).
McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK).
Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RIX).
FLUSH BOLTS
A.
Constant Latching Flush Bolts:
1.
Product Quality Standards:
a.
b.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Constant latching flush bolt at top remaining engaged when active door is opened,
retracting only when plunger on face of bolt is depressed.
Automatic flush bolt at bottom.
Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors.
Door Controls International (DCI); 805, 905 Series with No. 80 or No. 81 dustproof
strike.
Hager Companies (HAG); 293D, 294D with 280X dustproof strike.
Ives Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE); FB50, FB60 Series with DP1 or
DP2 dustproof strike.
Trimco (TBM); 3820, 3825 with 3910 or 3910N dustproof strike.
Manual Flush Bolts:
1.
Product Quality Standards:
a.
b.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
3.
ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors.
Minimum 1/2 in (12 mm) round rods, forged brass or bronze, furnished in pairs,
(top and bottom of door); lengths of rod 12 in (300 mm); where door is higher than
84 in (2.13 m), top bolt shall be of sufficient length to locate flush bolt operator 72
in (1.83 m) above finish floor.
Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 7
DOOR HARDWARE
4.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
Rockwood Mfg. Inc. 550, with 570 dustproof strike
Hager Companies (HAG); 281D.
Trimco (TBM); 244B, 3815 with 3910 or 3910N dustproof strike.
CYLINDERS
A.
Cylinders: Provided by the Owner
B.
Permanent Cores: Provided by the Owner
2.7
KEYING
A.
2.8
Keying System: Provided by the Owner
MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Product Quality Standards:
1.
B.
ANSI/BHMA A 156.13, Grade 1 Operational and Security, except extended cycle
performance testing shall be 6 million cycles minimum.
Description:
1.
Mortise Box Construction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Strikes: Metal strike plate with extended lip to protect frame, and with metal or plastic
strike box.
a.
b.
C.
Extra Heavy duty construction with minimum wrought case thickness of not less
than 0.093 in (2.3 mm) thickness.
8 in (200 mm) by 1-1/4 in (32 mm) front adjustable to 1/8 in (3 mm) in 2 in
(50 mm).
2-3/4 in (69 mm) backset.
Minimum 3/4 in (19 mm) latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors.
Minimum 1 in (25 mm) deadbolt throw.
Split hubs for split spindles.
Lever handles supported by internal spring.
Square, split spindles (with all-thread connector), set-screw receiver/retainer notch.
Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim.
Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style
of inactive leaf.
Function, Accessories, Lever Base Metal, Face Plate, Rose, and Finish:
PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 8
As scheduled in
DOOR HARDWARE
D.
Manufacturers and products:
1.
2.
3.
2.9
Best Access Systems; Division of The Stanley Works (BAS); 45 H Series.
Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR);
ML2000 Series.
Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); 8800
Series.
HOSPITAL LATCHSETS
A.
Product Quality Standards: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.
B.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Push-pull latchset with 1/2 in (12 mm) throw and 5 in (125 mm) backset.
Cover approximately 2-1/2 in (62 mm) by 5-1/2 in (137 mm).
Handle approximately 1-1/2 in (38 mm) by 4-1/2 in (112 mm).
Projection approximately 2-1/2 in (62 mm).
Engraved “PUSH” and “PULL” on handles, push handle pointing downward and pull
handle pointing upward.
C.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Architectural Builders Hardware (ABH).
Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (ROC).
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Product Quality Standards:
B.
Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.3, Grade 1, except extended cycle performance
testing shall be 8 million cycles minimum.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
NFPA 101 in means of egress.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.
Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to
UL 305 and NFPA 252.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heavy Duty Push bar type, unless scheduled otherwise.
Concealed vertical rods on pairs of doors, unless surface mounted vertical rods required
for fire rated doors.
Mortise lock or rim type devices on single doors only.
Outside trim as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 9
DOOR HARDWARE
5.
6.
Except on fire rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit
devices, equip units with keyed dogging device to keep latch bolt retracted, when
engaged.
Except at doors with thresholds, provide vertical rod devices which hold rods in retracted
position when door is open.
D.
Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets"
Article.
E.
Manufacturers and products:
1.
2.
3.
2.11
Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR);
ED5000 Series / ED4000 Series Narrow Stile.
Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 80 Series.
Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VON); 98/99 Series., 33 Series
CLOSERS
A.
Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4. Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 4 million
cycles minimum.
B.
Description: Manual overhead surface cast iron body closers with 1-1/2” diameter cylinder bore.
C.
Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather,
and anticipated frequency of use.
D.
Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible, provide adjustable units complying with accessibility requirements for door opening
force and delayed action closing.
E.
Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets"
Article.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
STOPS AND HOLDERS
Product Quality Standard
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR)
DC8200
LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 4011, 4111
SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT)-281-0
Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1.
Overhead Stays: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1.
Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A 156.15; coordinate with fire detectors and
interface with fire alarm system for fire rated doors.
Door Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 10
DOOR HARDWARE
2.13
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A.
Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.6.
B.
Description: Minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) thick metal plates with beveled top and 2 sides
fabricated in following configurations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armor Plates: 36 in (900 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
Kick Plates: 15 in (300 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
Mop Plates: 6 in (150 mm) high by 1 in (25 mm) less than door width.
Door Edging:
a.
b.
Angle: 7/8 in (21 mm) legs by 42 in (1050 mm) high mortised into door edge.
Cap: 7/8 in (21 mm) legs by thickness of door by 42 in (1050 mm) high mortised
into door edge.
C.
Fasteners: Exposed fasteners consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.
D.
Width and Thickness: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
E.
Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.14
A.
DOOR GASKETING
Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.22, and according to following when required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE).
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm/ft (0.000774 cu m/s/m) of crack length for gasketing
other than for smoke control according to ASTM E 283.
Smoke Leakage: Comply with NFPA 105 and listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings
indicated according to UL 1784.
Fire Rating: Comply with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction according to NFPA 252. After 5
minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in
(1,000 mm) or less above sill.
Sound Rating: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency according to
ASTM E 1408.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
National Guard Products (NGP).
Pemko Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PEM).
Hager Companies ( HAG )
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 11
DOOR HARDWARE
2.15
A.
MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE
Boxed Power Supplies:
1.
2.
B.
Description: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated;
voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and
labeled for use with fire alarm systems.
Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware
Sets" Article.
Auxiliary Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware
Sets" Article.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
C.
2.16
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE).
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
Trimco (TBM).
Silicone Sealant: Exterior non-sag silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint
Sealants.”
FINISHES
A.
Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.18, as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware
Sets" Article.
B.
Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine doors and frames to receive door hardware
and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as
acceptance of surface conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 12
DOOR HARDWARE
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
B.
Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A 250.6.
C.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
D.
Electrical: Verify raceway system and other provisions for electrical power are adequate for
electrified door hardware installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
C.
Respective manufacturer’s installation instructions.
ANSI/DHI A 115.IG.
Approved submittals.
Contract Documents.
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Hardware Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Set hardware items level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
Do not install surface-mounted hardware items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
D.
Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. Provide one power
supply for each door opening.
E.
Control Wiring:
1.
2.
3.4
Raceways: As specified and provided under appropriate Division 16 Section.
Connections: Coordinate with appropriate Division 16 Section.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturers Field Service: Manufacturers technical representative shall periodically inspect
Work to insure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 13
DOOR HARDWARE
designs, recommendations, instructions and warranty requirements. Representative shall
submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings and conclusions of
inspection.
3.5
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Post-Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of substantial completion,
qualified technicians of supplier or installer, accompanied by manufacturers technical
representatives of locksets, exit devices, closers, and other hardware manufacturers as
required, shall perform following Work:
1.
2.
B.
Examine and adjust each item of hardware as necessary to restore proper function of
doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty materials or
installation.
Maintenance Service:
1.
First Year Maintenance Service: Beginning at date of substantial completion, supplier or
installer shall provide 12 months maintenance service by qualified technicians.
a.
b.
3.6
Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper hardware
operation.
Provide parts and supplies same as those used in manufacture and installation of
original products.
CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES
A.
3.7
Operational and Maintenance Training: Train Owner's personnel on maintenance, operation,
and adjustment of door hardware at Project using factory-trained and certified technicians.
Provide attendees with bound copies of training materials
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to the drawings. Provide products as listed in hardware sets or provide a comparable
product from another listed manufacturer. Do not provide products by manufacturers not listed
in this specification.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 7100 - 14
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Glass, glazing, and supplementary items necessary for installation; including
glass specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, installation instructions, and
recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of each type of glazing in conjunction with the appropriate framing
system; indicate type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material, and quantity. Include details
indicating glazing thickness, bite on glass, glass edge clearance, and depth of rabbet.
C.
Samples for Verification Purposes: For each type of glass product and glazing material, in the form
of 12 in (300 mm) square sample for glass (except clear) and of 12 in (300 mm) long samples for
glazing materials.
D.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Documents: Certifications by the manufacturer that its products
and systems are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and
for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Certification attesting application and use of glass for effects of thermal loading under
expected service temperature ranges has been reviewed, and specified maximum
probabilities of breakage will not be exceeded.
Certifications attesting performance for specified design wind load criteria, has been
reviewed; furnish design factor, statistical probability of breakage and center deflection for the
largest size of each thickness and type.
Certifications attesting face pressure of heat-strengthened glass units falls within limits
specified. Glass determined to be outside these limits shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
1.
For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within
previous 36-month period.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 1
GLAZING
G.
Qualification Data:
1.
H.
1.3
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years of experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing
standard with which glass complies.
1.
2.
D.
1.4
Experience: Installer’s personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in performing
specified Work similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service
performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times
specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type
and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to
manufacturer to install products.
Certification: Installer shall be certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass
Installer Program.
Acceptable Products: Complying with CSPC 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
Products Not Permitted: Wired Glass.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with
certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature
rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass
and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other
causes.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 2
GLAZING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as
judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, those listed.
B.
Glass Type Schedules:
1.
2.
2.2
Exterior: Not used.
Interior: As indicated on the drawings. Provide glazing panes 1/4 in (6 mm) thick unless noted
otherwise.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated, where recommended by manufacturer to comply
with performance requirements or required for safety glazing.
Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
B.
Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16 inch (5 mm) nominal thickness.
1.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite
Safti First, a Division of O'Keefe's Inc.; SuperLite C/SP (for ratings up to 45-minute
only)
Schott North America, Inc.; Pyran Star
Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-R
Locations: Where indicated on drawings for 20-, 45-, 60-, and 90-minute ratings where safety
glazing is not required.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 3
GLAZING
C.
Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16inch (8-mm) total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
1.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.5
Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus
Oldcastle Glass, Inc.; Pyroguard
Schott North America, Inc.; Pyran Star L
Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L
Locations: Where indicated on drawings for 20-, 45-, 60-, 90-, and 120-minute ratings where
safety glazing is required.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and
glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
Additional Movement Capability: Provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the
specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in
compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
C.
BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50.
Dow Corning Corporation; 795.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Silglaze II.
Pecora Corporation; 895.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies
that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and
fire-protection ratings indicated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 4
GLAZING
2.6
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape;
nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying
with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.7
AAMA 806.3 tape is for high-performance commercial glazing applications involving
continuous pressure from gaskets or pressure-generating stop designs. AAMA 806.3 tape,
for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and
with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus
5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to
maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density
to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed
and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection
rating indicated.
2.8
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 5
GLAZING
B.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners.
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which
would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
C.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that
exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible
marks in the completed work.
3.4
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant
suitable for heel bead.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 6
GLAZING
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing
tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to
comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in
referenced glazing publications.
I.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on
opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected
to movement.
3.5
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with
or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal
joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.6
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites
and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass
channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in
place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum
sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of
sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 7
GLAZING
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels
and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If,
despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.8
GLAZING SCHEDULE
A.
Tape Glazing:
1.
2.
B.
Interior door glass lites.
Interior borrowed lights less than 75 united inches.
Sealant and Tape Glazing:
1.
Interior borrowed lights greater than 75 united inches.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
08 8000 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Metal framing systems, interior gypsum board faced walls, partitions, and ceiling
assemblies, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms not defined
in this Section or in other referenced quality standards.
B.
Damage: Stored or installed paper-faced gypsum board materials not specifically manufactured as
“moisture-resistant products” shall be classified as defective and nonconforming Work if they have
been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to Substantial Completion or if they exhibit
evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
B.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation
instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components and attachments to other work. Include scaled and dimensioned drawings
showing locations of control joints.
1.
Gypsum Board Location Schedule: Provide detailed schedule in format similar to “Gypsum
Board Schedule” at end of this Section indicating gypsum board products to be installed and
their respective locations.
C.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
D.
Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s)
are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for
applications indicated, specified, or required.
E.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
1.
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.
1.4
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Fire Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to
those tested according to ASTM E 119/NFPA 251/UL 263 by one of following independent testing
and inspecting agency as evidenced by design designation included in their associated approval
manual:
1.
2.
3.
UL - “Fire Resistance Directory”, Category BXUV.
GA 600 - “Fire Resistance Design Manual”.
Other agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Smoke Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to
those tested according to indicated fire resistance rated assemblies by independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Sound (STC) Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction
identical to those tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by
independent and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation,
direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and
supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Conditions: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or respective gypsum board
manufacturer’s written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable
working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent
deformation or failure of materials.
B.
Design Loads: Engineer to withstand design loads including but not limited to gravity, wind, seismic,
and erection design loads established by authorities having jurisdiction, applicable local building
codes, and as indicated.
1.
Structural Movement: Engineer to withstand movements of structure including, but not limited
to, drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep and deflection from uniformly distributed
and concentrated live loads. Contractor shall obtain required design data and identify
movements accommodated on submittal drawings.
a.
C.
2.4
Accommodate plus or minus 3/8 in (10 mm) differential vertical deflection of floors.
Dimensional Tolerances: Engineer products and systems to accommodate dimensional tolerances
of framing members and adjacent construction.
SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS
A.
Suspension System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 645, heavy-duty rating.
Description: Manufacturer's standard direct-hung suspended grid system composed of main
beams and cross furring .members that interlock to form a modular supporting network for
application of gypsum board.
Protective Coating - Standard Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G40 (Z120),
hot-dip galvanized coating, unless otherwise indicated.
Main Beams: Inverted T-shaped profile of single or double mounting flange; minimum
1 1/2 in (38 mm) profile height with top bulb and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled
mounting flange; factory punched for hanger wire, and to receive cross furring members.
Cross Furring Members:
a.
b.
6.
7.
Tees: Inverted T-shaped profile of single or double mounting flange; 1-1/2 in (38 mm)
profile height with top bulb and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting
flange; with ends formed for positive interlocking with main beam.
Channels: Inverted hat shaped profile; minimum 7/8 in (21 mm) profile height and
minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange; with ends formed for positive
interlocking with main beam.
Wall Angle: Angle shaped profile with each leg not less than 1-1/4 in (32 mm).
Accessories: Specifically designed as an integral part of suspended grid system.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
8.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed
by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified
independent testing agency.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete.
Post-installed chemical anchor.
Post-installed expansion anchor.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity,
powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of
sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent
testing agency.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
Armstrong World Industries Inc.; Drywall Grid System.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; 650-C/670-C Fire-Rated Drywall Grid System.
United States Gypsum Company (USG Interiors, Inc.); Drywall Suspension System.
Construction Materials, Inc.
Heckman Building Products, Inc.
Hilti Corp.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Powers Fasteners.
Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
For post-tensioned concrete, anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain
Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned concrete
prior to installation.
Wire:
1.
2.
3.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM A 641 / A 641M, Class 1, zinc-coated, soft annealed, mild
steel wire.
Tie Wire Minimum Size: Single 0.0625 in (16 gage) (1.6 mm) diameter strand, or double
0.0475 in (18 gage) (1.2 mm) diameter strands. Preformed furring channel clips are
acceptable.
Hanger Wire Minimum Size: 0.1620 in (8 gage) (4.12 mm) diameter.
D.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, 7/32 in (0.56 mm) diameter mild carbon steel rod, with
primer painted finish.
E.
Flat Hangers: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, 1 in by 3/16 in (25 mm by 5 mm) by length indicated or
required, with primer painted finish.
F.
Angle Hangers: ASTM A 36 / A 36M, rolled steel angle, 2 in by 2 in (50 mm by 50 mm), with primer
painted finish.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 4
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.5
METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A.
Material Quality Standard: Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to
comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Sheet Steel: ASTM C 645 for metal.
Protective Coating - Standard Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G40 (Z120),
hot-dip galvanized coating, unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Studs and Floor Track (Runners):
1.
Standard Metal Framing Components for Typical Partitions:
a.
Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with
1 1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 13/64 in
(5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated
base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section;
with web punchouts.
1)
b.
Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel
with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by
friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs.
1)
2)
2.
Floor Track (Runner): 1-1/4in (32 mm).
Top of Wall Track (Runner): 3 in (75 mm).
Metal Framing for Shaftwall Partitions:
a.
b.
3.
Alternative Jamb Stud Members - Contractor’s Option: “Heavy Duty” or “King”
studs; C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with 3 in
(75 mm) flange width; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base
metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section.
Stud Description: C-H, double E, C-T, or I-shaped members formed from galvanized
sheet steel; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness
indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section; with web punchouts.
Track (Runner) and Jamb Description: J-shaped track or jamb members formed from
galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension
indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal
thickness as studs.
Conversion of Gage to Minimum Thickness for Metal Framing: When metal framing is
indicated to be of a specific gage thickness, following shall be uncoated base metal thickness
according to SSMAs “Product Technical Information”, 2000 :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
25 Gage: 0.0188 in (0.48 mm) design thickness; 18 mils minimum thickness.
22 Gage: 0.0283 in (0.72 mm) design thickness; 27 mils minimum thickness.
20 Gage Drywall: 0.0312 in (0.79 mm) design thickness; 30 mils minimum thickness.
20 Gage Structural: 0.0346 in (0.88 mm) design thickness; 33 mils minimum
thickness.
18 Gage: 0.0451 in (1.15 mm) design thickness; 43 mils minimum thickness.
16 Gage: 0.0566 in (1.44 mm) design thickness; 54 mils minimum thickness.
14 Gage: 0.0713 in (1.81 mm) design thickness; 68 mils minimum thickness.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 5
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
h.
i.
4.
5.
12 Gage: 0.1017 in (2.58 mm) design thickness; 97 mils minimum thickness.
Optional Equivalent Products: Thickness as required for meeting specified criteria for
deformed metal studs and tracks (runners) specified elsewhere in this Article.
Minimum thickness represents 95 percent of design thickness and is minimum acceptable
thickness of material for Work.
Optional Equivalent Products - Deformed Metal Studs and Tracks (Runners):
a.
b.
c.
d.
Evaluation Criteria: Product test reports and certifications from independent testing
agency indicating products comply with requirements and are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM A 1003 / A 1003M sheet steel with galvanized
coating.
Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from deformed surface galvanized
sheet steel with 1-1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and bent again to
form 3/16 in (5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and
uncoated base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this
Section; with web punchouts.
Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from deformed surface
galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension
indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal
thickness as studs.
C.
Flat Straps and Back-Up Plates: Galvanized sheet steel for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated, of same uncoated base metal thickness as adjacent metal studs.
D.
Bridging:
1.
2.
Channel: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0566 in
(16 gage) (1.44 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness, with 1/2 in (12 mm) flanges
and depth fitting stud punchouts.
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm by 38 mm) L-shaped members formed from
galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0713 in (14 gage) (1.81 mm) uncoated base metal
thickness.
E.
Rigid Furring Channels: Hat-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than
0.0312 in (20 gage) (0.78 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness; 7/8 in (21 mm) depth and
minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange.
F.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 in (12 mm) deep members formed from galvanized sheet steel not
less than 0.0283 in (22 gage) (0.72 mm) minimum bare-metal thickness, designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1.
G.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Building Products Division of Consolidated Fabricators Corp.
California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO).
ClarkDietrich Building Systems
Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries.
Scafco Corp.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 6
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.6
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A.
Sizes: Maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize short edge-to-short edge butt joints
and to correspond to support system indicated.
B.
Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board Products:
1.
Paper-Faced Type X Gypsum Board:
a.
b.
2.
Paper-Faced Type C Gypsum Board:
a.
b.
C.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X.
Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core, with additives to enhance fire
resistance, with paper surfacing on face, back, and long edges; tapered long edges;
5/8 in (15 mm) thick.
Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board Products:
1.
Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board:
a.
b.
2.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X.
Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core, with
moisture-resistant paper surfacing on face, back and long edges; tapered long edges;
score of 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick.
Moisture-Resistant Paperless Glass-Mat Gypsum Board:
a.
b.
2.7
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X.
Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core with paper surfacing on face,
back, and long edges; tapered long edges; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1177 / C 1177M.
Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core with
inorganic, embedded fiberglass mat on both faces; square edges; score or 10
according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Typical Drywall Trim Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1047.
Description: Trim profile fabricated of galvanized steel sheet; of size suitable for gypsum
board thickness; with recessed, perforated flange formed to receive joint compound.
Trim Products:
a.
Cornerbead:
1)
2)
Purpose: For protecting outside (external) corners.
Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); Dur-ABead Corner Bead, 103.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 7
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
b.
LC-Bead (J-Bead):
1)
2)
c.
L-Bead:
1)
2)
d.
2)
3)
4.
Description: One-piece trim formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip
covering slot opening.
Purpose: For conditions requiring expansion and contraction stresses of large
areas of gypsum board to be relieved.
Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG);
Control Joint, 093.
Other Trim or Special Shapes: Products as required by condition.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.8
Purpose: For protecting edges of gypsum board that does not require finishing.
Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); JStop, 402.
Control Joint:
1)
f.
Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange
cannot be used.
Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); LTrim, 200-B.
J-Stop:
1)
2)
e.
Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange
can be used.
Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); JTrim, 200-A.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.; Unimast.
Fry Reglet Architectural Metals.
Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries.
Niles Building Products Co.
Superior Metal Trim; Division of Delta Star, Inc.
United States Gypsum Company (USG)
FASTENERS
A.
Limitations: Nails and staples are not permitted.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 8
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
B.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Framing to Concrete Structure:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed
by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified
independent testing agency.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity,
powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of
sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent
testing agency.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete.
Post-installed chemical anchor.
Post-installed expansion anchor.
Construction Materials, Inc.
Heckman Building Products, Inc.
Hilti Corp.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Powers Fasteners.
Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
For post-tensioned concrete, anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain
Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned concrete
prior to installation.
C.
Metal Framing Screws: Screw fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten metal framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications
indicated.
D.
Gypsum Board Screws:
1.
Material Quality Standards:
a.
b.
2.
E.
Metal Framing Members less than 0.03 in (0.75 mm) Thick: ASTM C 1002, Type S.
Metal Framing Members from 0.033 in to 0.112 in (0.79 mm to 2.9 mm) Thick:
ASTM C 954, Type S-12.
Product Description - Standard Applications: Bugle-head, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel
screws with Phillips-head recess of size, holding power, and other properties recommended
by respective gypsum board manufacturer; minimum 1 in (25 mm) long; with corrosionprotective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to
ASTM B 117.
Miscellaneous Fasteners: For conditions not indicated, fasteners shall be type, finish, size, and
holding power recommended by respective gypsum board manufacturer and conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 9
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.9
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 475 / C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Joint Compound:
1.
2.
2.10
Paper Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide cross-fibered paper tape with finish suitable for
bonding, creased in center for easy folding, and compatible with joint compound.
Mesh Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide self-adhering 10-by-10 fiberglass mesh tape.
Setting-Type: Job-mixed powder for mixing with water, chemical-hardening compound;
includes taping types.
Drying-Type: Ready-mixed or job-mixed powder for mixing with water, air-drying, vinyl based
compounds; includes taping, topping, and all-purpose types.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
quality standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B.
Firestopping Products at Penetrations:
Firestopping”.
C.
Fiberglass Sound Attenuation Blankets:
1.
2.
3.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I.
Description: Unfaced blankets produced by bonding inorganic glass fibers with a
thermosetting binder.
Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723:
a.
b.
4.
5.
Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25.
Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
Thickness: Not less than 2-1/2 in (62 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
As specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration
CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro AcoustaTherm Batts.
Johns Manville Building Insulation Div.; Sound Control Batts.
Knauf Fiber Glass; QuietTherm.
Owens Corning; Sound Attenuation Batts.
Mineral Wool Sound Attenuation Blankets:
1.
2.
3.
Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I.
Description: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of
rock or slag with thermosetting resins.
Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723:
a.
b.
Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25.
Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 10
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
4.
5.
6.
Thickness: Not less than 3 in (75 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Density: Not less than nominal 2.5 pounds per cubic foot.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Acoustical Sealant for Non-Fire Resistance Rated Joints:
1.
2.
Description: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that is
effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
F.
Fibrex Insulations, Inc.
Rock Wool Manufacturing Co.
Roxul.
Thermafiber LLC.
Hilti Inc.; CP 506 Acoustical Sealant and CP 572 Acoustical Spray.
Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
United States Gypsum Company (USG); Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.
Fire-Resistance Rated and Acoustical Putty Pads:
1.
2.
3.
Product Quality Standard: UL 1479.
Description: Fire-rated, non-hardening, moldable, intumescent compound formed into sheets
designed to seal penetrations, construction gaps, and around electrical boxes against spread
of fire, smoke, and toxic gases.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Grace Construction Products; Flamesafe FSP 1077 Putty Pads.
Hilti; CP 617 Intumescent Acoustic Putty Pads.
KnaufDrywall; Putty Pads.
Specified Technologies, Inc; Series SSP Putty Pads.
Tremco; TREMstop Electrical Box Insert.
3M; Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+Pads.
G.
Fire Resistive Sealants: Intumescent elastomeric sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “FireResistive Joint Firestopping”.
H.
Sealants: Sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 11
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.3
Respective Manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
Gypsum Association GA 216.
United States Gypsum Company (USG); Gypsum Construction Handbook, if no other
installation quality standard applies to condition.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and
other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which
would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B.
Suspended Gypsum Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation
of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure
have been installed to receive hanger wires at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers
will develop their full strength.
C.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistance Materials:
1.
2.
3.4
Pre-Application Coordination: Before sprayed fire-resistance materials are applied, attach Z
shaped clips and offset mounting plates to structural steel members with powder actuated
fasteners, leaving portion of flange exposed outside of sprayed fire-resistive materials to
attach head of wall track for gypsum board assembly.
Post-Application Coordination: After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove
materials only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies, attach Z
shaped clips and offset mounting plates to structural steel members with powder actuated
fasteners, leaving portion of flange exposed outside of sprayed fire-resistive materials to
attach head of wall track for gypsum board assembly, and patch with fire-resistive material
specified in Division 07 Section “Cementitious Fireproofing” that is required to obtain fireresistance rating indicated.
INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Resistance Rated Partitions: Construct fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound
resistance rated partitions according to respective assembly test reports. Ensure every material
used within an assembly shall comply with manufacturers listed and product qualities indicated in
respective assembly test report.
B.
Penetrations and Openings: Construct within gypsum board assemblies work as required to
properly form penetration or opening to receive firestopping materials specified in following Sections:
1.
2.
Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping”.
Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping”.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 12
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect and according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Spaced not more than 30 feet in either direction for uninterrupted straight planes of ceilings
and walls.
Where different substrates occur at ceilings and walls.
Where control joints occur in substrates at ceilings and walls.
Where ceilings and walls abut inside face of exterior walls.
Where L, U, or T shaped ceiling configurations are joined.
Where less-than-ceiling-height door frames occur on walls more than 30 feet in length;
extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling at corner of hinge side of door.
Where less-than-ceiling-height borrowed lites occur on walls more than 30 feet in length;
extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling and from bottom of frame to floor at both
corners.
Isolation from Building Structure: Isolate gypsum board assemblies from building structure to
prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
Provide isolation joints as indicated or required by installation quality standards.
Isolate ceiling assemblies abutting or penetrated by building structure.
Isolate partition framing and wall furring abutting or penetrated by building structure, except at
floor.
E.
Fire-Resistance Rated and Acoustical Putty Pads: Hand apply pads to surfaces indicated, packing
tightly into gaps and openings, in such a manner that pad will remain secured to surface; pinch pleat
excess material together to close gaps.
F.
Supplemental Accessories: Install supplementary framing, blocking, reinforcing, and bracing in
gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet
accessories, hand rails, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and
recommendations of installation quality standards or manufacturer.
3.5
INSTALLING SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS
A.
Installation Quality Standard: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform suspended ceiling
work according to following, unless otherwise specified in this Section:
1.
2.
ASTM C635 and ASTM C 636 / C 636M.
CISCA - “Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Ceilings - Seismic
Zones 0 - 2”, except as may be modified by building code.
B.
Pattern: Lay out spaces and arrange suspension system in a regular pattern, parallel or
perpendicular to surrounding walls.
C.
Hangers for Ceiling System: Suspend hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with mechanical and electrical equipment,
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural
frame or ceiling suspension system. Within limitations allowed by installation quality
standards, splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with location of hangers required to support suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 13
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by installation quality standards.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and
in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Secure the appropriate hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Install metal framing components for suspended ceilings so that members are level to within
1/8 in in 12 ft (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both lengthwise on each member and
transversely between parallel members.
Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect or suspend any ceiling components from ducts, pipes or conduit.
D.
Perimeters: Using gypsum board screws through gypsum board into metal studs, attach perimeter
wall angle where suspended grid system meets vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated; cut
main beams and cross furring members to fit into wall angle.
E.
Main Beams:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Cross Furring Members:
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.6
Suspend main beams spaced 48 in (1200 mm) on center from structure with wire hangers
spaced not greater than 48 in (1200 mm) on center.
Install main beams level within 1/8 in in 12 ft (3 mm in 3.6 m) with hanger wire taut and tightly
wrapped to prevent vertical movement or rotation.
Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling.
Install cross furring members at right angles to main beams, spaced as required and join to
main beams with positive interlock.
Install cross furring members to within 1/32 in (0.8 mm) of their required location and within
0.015 in (0.38 mm) of same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous
member.
Install additional cross furring members at right angles to beams and cross furring members
to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers or grilles.
Concentrated Load Conditions: Provide additional hanger wires at each corner of recessed light
fixtures and other concentrated load conditions to prevent excess deflection.
INSTALLING METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A.
Priority: Assemble various assemblies giving priority to partitions with higher rating; extend partition
with higher rating intact through partition with lower rating.
B.
Joinery and Connections: Install various metal framing components according to details indicated;
for situations and conditions not indicated, comply with installation quality standards and with
respective manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.
General Requirements: Construct partition framing of studs, tracks, and headers using screws of
number and spacing required.
1.
Install studs of uncoated base metal thickness as determined by Metal Framing Schedule at
end of this Section.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 14
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Extend partition framing full height to underside of structure above, except where partitions
are indicated to terminate at, or immediately above, suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over door frames and openings to provide support for gypsum board.
Space studs as indicated on Metal Framing Schedule at end of this section.
Cut studs 1 in (25 mm) short of full height to provide deflection relief at head of wall
conditions.
Install studs so that flanges point in same direction.
Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange, except top deflection
track assemblies.
For fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound resistance rated assemblies that
are required to extend to underside of structure above to obtain ratings, install framing around
structural and other members extending below floor slabs or roof decks, as needed to support
gypsum board closures and make partitions continuous from floor to underside of structure
above.
Do not lap studs.
At intersections and corners, locate studs no more than 2 in (50 mm) from partition
intersections and corners and secure with screws through both flanges of studs and tracks.
Metal Track (Runner) Requirements:
1.
2.
Floors: Install tracks (runners) using appropriate fasteners spaced not more than 16 in
(400 mm) on centers.
Head of Wall: Install deep leg deflection tracks using appropriate fasteners to laterally
support assembly, and to avoid axial loading of assembly by deflection from building structure
above.
E.
Support for Wall Mounted Accessories or Equipment: Install back-up plate or track (runner) turned
on its side, using screws as indicated or as required, to studs to properly transfer accessory or
equipment load to metal framing.
F.
Openings: Frame single door, double door, above ceiling openings, and below ceiling openings
using studs, tracks (runners), clip angles, and headers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install 2 studs on each side of each opening in configuration indicated, including strap plates;
extend from floor to underside of structure above; do not cut these studs under any
circumstances.
Construct header of appropriate configuration for type of opening to be spanned and secure
with clip angles; include sound attenuation blankets within cavity when partition is scheduled
to have a sound resistance rating.
Install short intermediate studs 16 in (400 mm) on center between top track and header.
At partitions indicated to terminate immediately above ceiling, install diagonal bracing at not
less than spacing as indicated.
G.
Supplementary Framing: Install around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support
of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar
items that cannot be supported directly by metal framing.
H.
Penetrations: Maintain fire-resistance rating of assembly by installing supplementary steel framing
around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator
call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 15
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
I.
Chase Partitions:
1.
2.
3.
Position double row of studs vertically in tracks (runners), opposite each other in pairs with
flanges pointing in same direction.
Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange.
Cross brace between rows of studs with one of following at 48 in (1200 mm) on center
maximum vertically, attached to stud webs with screws:
a.
b.
J.
Furred Walls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K.
2.
3.7
Erect furring channels vertically, spaced 16 in (400 mm) on centers maximum, unless
otherwise indicated.
Attach with appropriate fasteners, staggered on flanges.
Splice ends by nesting channels 8 in (200 mm) and securely anchoring to surface.
Miter 24 in (600 mm) long horizontal furring channels at corners and space 24 in (600 mm) on
centers vertically.
Locate furring channels around perimeter of openings and secure to surfaces.
Control Joints:
1.
L.
Coated glass-mat gypsum board, 12 in (300 mm) high by chase width.
Metal studs turned on side, webs back-to-back.
Construct metal framing as indicated by installation quality standard to allow gypsum board
control joints to function as intended.
For control joints located in fire resistance rated walls and partitions, construct of metal studs
and mineral wool, full height of partition, according to assembly fire test reports.
Installation Tolerances: Install each metal stud metal framing and furring member so that fastening
surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 in (3 mm) from plane formed by faces of framing members.
INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Install type of gypsum board at location indicated by gypsum board schedule at end of this
Section.
Do not install damaged gypsum boards.
Install gypsum boards with finishable face side out.
Butt gypsum boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 in
(1.5 mm) of open space between panels.
Do not force gypsum boards into place.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Isolation from Building Structure:
1.
2.
3.
Isolate perimeter of walls and partitions at structural abutments, except floors.
Provide 1/4 in to 1/2 in (6 mm in 12 mm) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of gypsum boards are exposed.
Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C.
Single-Layer Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
At typical conditions, install gypsum board vertically (long dimension parallel to metal
framing), to minimize short end-to-short end joints unless otherwise indicated or required by
assembly fire test reports.
At interior of stairwells and other high walls, install gypsum boards horizontally, unless
otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. Stagger abutting end joints not
less than one framing member in alternate courses of gypsum boards.
D.
Multi-Layer Board Assemblies: Apply base layers and face layers vertically (long dimension parallel
to metal framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints
offset at least one stud space from base layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
assembly fire test reports. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
E.
Ceiling Applications:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Typical Wall Applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
Apply gypsum board at right angles to main beams of suspension framing to minimize
number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling.
Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
Locate both edge or end joints of gypsum boards over intermediate supports or gypsum
board back-blocking where metal framing is not present.
Attach gypsum boards to metal studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions.
Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
Attach gypsum boards to framing provided at doors, openings and cutouts. Install gypsum
boards over door heads and extend to not less than one stud space - 16 in (400 mm) at each
side of door or opening.
Cover both faces of metal framing with gypsum boards as indicated, except in chase walls
that are braced internally.
Cut and fit gypsum boards around ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations to form
proper annular joint to receive firestopping.
Where partitions intersect open building structure members projecting below underside of
floor slabs and roof decks, cut to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, beams, and other
structural members; form proper annular joint to receive firestopping.
Support both edge and end joints of gypsum boards over metal framing.
Screw Attachments:
1.
Attach gypsum board to metal framing with screw fasteners of type appropriate for gypsum
board materials and installation conditions:
a.
b.
c.
Length shall be as required by condition and penetrating metal framing not less than
3/8 in (10 mm).
Spacing shall be as recommended by installation quality standard, gypsum board
manufacturer, or respective assembly test report.
Use properly adjusted, positive-clutch electric power tool equipped with adjustable
screw-depth head and a Phillips bit. Nails and staples are not permitted.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 17
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drive screws to slightly dimple surface without breaking face paper, fracturing core, or
stripping metal framing member around screw shank.
Space screws for non-fire resistance rated partitions and ceilings as recommended by
installation quality standards.
Space screws for fire resistance rated partitions as required by assembly fire test reports.
Start field screwing near center and work towards edges.
Space screws not less than 3/8 in (10 mm) from gypsum boards edges.
Do not attach gypsum boards to top runner where wall or partition extends to building
structure unless required by fire test reports.
H.
Control Joints: Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated with required space
between edges of adjoining gypsum boards.
I.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Install blankets within stud cavities set so that they are held in place by
friction with metal studs; ensure blankets are secure within cavity and will not become displaced
when second gypsum board side is closed.
J.
Sealant:
1.
2.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturers written recommendations for closing off soundflanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
Seal wall assemblies at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations
with a continuous bead of sealant material according to following:
a.
b.
c.
3.8
Fire Resistance Sealant: Joints within fire resistance rated assemblies.
Water Resistance Sealant: Joints within non-fire resistance rated assemblies exposed
to possible water infiltration.
Acoustical Sealant: All other joints.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Fasten trim accessories continuously according to accessory manufacturer's instructions
using gypsum board screws; installation by clinch-on tool and staples not permitted.
B.
Typical Trim Accessories:
1.
2.
Corner Beads: Install trim at external corners; use screws at each flange at 9 in (225 mm) on
centers, opposite each other.
Edge Trim: Install trim where gypsum boards abut dissimilar material, and where edge of
gypsum boards would otherwise be exposed; use screws at flange at 9 in (225 mm) on
centers.
a.
b.
c.
3.
LC-Bead (J-Bead): Install trim at exposed conditions where back flange can be
attached to framing or supporting substrate before gypsum board installation.
L-Bead: Install trim at exposed conditions where trim can only be installed after
gypsum board installation.
J-Stop: Install trim at concealed conditions where trim can only be installed after
gypsum board installation.
Control Joints: Install trim at appropriate locations, ensuring gypsum board is not continuous
over joint; use screws at each flange at 6 in (150 mm) on centers.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 18
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.9
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A.
General: Treat board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads,
surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare surfaces for decoration.
B.
Joint Tape: Finish joints according to following:
1.
2.
C.
Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Paper.
Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Mesh tape.
Finishing: Finish boards and units to achieve specified level of finish as indicated in schedule at end
of Section:
1.
Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Either or combination of the following as recommended
by manufacturer:
a.
b.
2.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
Setting-type joint compounds.
Drying-type joint compounds.
Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Setting-type joint compounds.
ADJUSTMENTS
Damaged Materials: Stored or installed paper-faced gypsum board materials not specifically
manufactured as “moisture-resistant products” shall be classified as damaged, defective, and
nonconforming Work if they have been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to
Substantial Completion or if they exhibit evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew. Damaged
materials and assemblies shall be replaced with new and dry materials and assemblies.
PROTECTION
Procedures: Protect products and systems from damage during installation and remainder of
construction period according to manufacturer's instructions.
METAL FRAMING SCHEDULE
Metal Stud Framing Schedule:
1.
2.
3.
Stud Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Spacing: Maximum 16 in (400 mm) on centers, unless otherwise indicated, or as required to
comply with respective assembly test report.
Minimum Performance Requirements - unless otherwise indicated:
a.
4.
Typical Partitions: L/240 at 5 lb/sq ft (239 Pa) lateral load
Minimum Uncoated Base Metal Thickness:
a.
Typical Gypsum Board Assemblies: As determined by manufacturer’s limiting height
engineering data unless otherwise indicated.
1)
2)
25 Gage or 25 Gage Equivalent Studs: Not acceptable.
22 Gage Studs: Typical partitions unless otherwise indicated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 19
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3)
20 Gage or 20 Gage Equivalent Studs:
a)
b)
c)
3.13
Partitions with gypsum board on one side only.
At door jambs.
Partitions supporting wall hung cabinets or shelving.
GYPSUM BOARD SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board Schedule, General: Install the designated gypsum board product based on
exposure classification to water and / or moisture and applied finish system as follows, unless
otherwise indicated or scheduled on the Drawings.
B.
No Exposure: Surfaces not normally exposed to water and / or moisture sources including but not
limited to the following:
1.
Typical walls and ceilings.
a.
b.
2.
Horizontal fire-rated assemblies and ceilings:
a.
C.
Paint: Paper-faced Type C gypsum board.
Incidental Exposure: Surfaces immediately adjacent to water and / or moisture sources including,
but not limited to, the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Top of walls above ceilings adjacent to mechanical equipment in corridors.
Walls and ceilings in mechanical equipment rooms and janitor closets.
Walls within 24 inches of centerline of drinking fountains, isolated wall-hung lavatories, and
countertop sinks and other similar water sources.
Interior face of exterior walls.
Acceptable gypsum board products for the above listed conditions:
a.
b.
3.14
Paint: Typical paper-faced gypsum board.
Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board.
Paint: Moisture-resistant paper-faced or moisture-resistant paperless glass-mat
gypsum board.
Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board.
GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board Finishing Schedule, General: Finish panels to Levels of Finish indicated below.
Apply joint tape over panel joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. Sand
between coats and after last coat to produce a surface free of defects and ready for applied finish
system.
B.
Preparation: Apply joint compound at open joints, panel edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Level 1: At following locations, embed tape at joints in joint compound unless a higher level of finish
is required for fire resistance rated assemblies:
1.
2.
Areas above ceilings.
Concealed areas.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 20
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
D.
Level 2: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape,
fasteners, and trim flanges:
1.
E.
Level 3: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first and second coats of joint
compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges:
1.
F.
Mechanical, electrical, and data rooms.
Level 4: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint
compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges:
1.
G.
Not used.
Areas to receive paint.
Level 5: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint
compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface:
1.
Not used.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 21
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 2900 - 22
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Acoustical lay-in ceiling panels, exposed metal suspension systems, and
supplementary items necessary for installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details,
installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of acoustical ceiling panel product and suspension
system indicated. Include samples of accessories involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification Purposes: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in
sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected
in these characteristics.
1.
2.
Acoustical Panels: Set of 6 in (150 mm) square samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 in (300 mm) long
samples of each type, finish, and color.
E.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.
1.
2.
G.
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in
this Section.
Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with
successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of
successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5
years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required
Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production
capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project site during
times specified Work is in progress that is experienced in installing systems similar to
type and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable
to manufacturer to install products.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor, including superintendent.
Installer, including project manager and supervisor.
Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review Work requirements (Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract
Documents).
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the
manufacturer’s specifications.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 2
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
3.
1.5
Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements
reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements
exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set
date for reconvening conference.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Extra Materials: Furnish the following extra materials that match and are from same production
runs as products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents:
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2
percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as
judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 3
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.
2.3
Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same
manufacturer if both are offered by the manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Products and systems shall be engineered to withstand loads within
limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and
without permanent deformation or failure of materials.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84, VUSBC Section 803 and NFPA 101
Chapter 10; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Seismic Standards: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings:
Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings-Seismic
Zones 0-2".
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,
"Earthquake Loads".
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectance's, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other
listed available manufacturers:
a.
2.5
Refer to the drawings.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 4
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct
Hung”, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Comply with seismic design requirements.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five
times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or
ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Cast-in-place anchors, designed for attachment to concrete.
Post-installed expansion anchors.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM
B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC1 service condition.
Powder-Actuated Anchors: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A10.3; low velocity,
powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable
of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
4.
D.
For post-tensioned concrete, anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain
Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned
concrete prior to installation.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
E.
Construction Materials, Inc.
Heckman Building Products, Inc.
Hilti Corp.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Powers Fasteners.
Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 / A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106 in (2.69 mm) diameter wire.
Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit
acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of
same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1.
2.
3.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's
standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 5
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
4.
5.
Where required by Code or authorities having jurisdiction, provide 2 in (50 mm) wide wall
angle around the ceiling perimeter in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F.
Round Column Angle Molding: Extruded aluminum with PVC spacer, size as required for
column diameter, finish to match suspension system.
F.
Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system,
including gasket type indicated below, and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention clips,
designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean room.
G.
Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, non-hardening, nonskinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints.
2.6
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
A.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653 / A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation,
with prefinished 15/16 in (24 mm) wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
Face Design: Flush face.
Cap Material: Steel sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white, unless indicated otherwise.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL
CertainTeed Corporation; Classic Stab
Chicago Metallic Corporation; 1200 System
USG Interiors, Inc.; Donn DX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems
and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as
acceptance of surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
ASTM C635 and ASTM C 636 / C 636M.
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 6
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors
which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in
Work.
B.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors.
Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance
of time needed for coordinating other work.
C.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with mechanical and electrical equipment,
insulation, or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural
frame or ceiling suspension system. Within limitations allowed by installation quality
standards, splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by installation
quality standards.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast-inplace hanger inserts, power-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through
forms into concrete.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 in (1200 mm) on center along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than
8 in (200 mm) from ends of each member.
Do not connect or suspend any ceiling components from ducts, pipes or conduit.
Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling.
Concentrated Load Conditions: Provide additional hanger wires at each corner of recessed
light fixtures and other concentrated load conditions to prevent excess deflection.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 7
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
C.
Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
1.
E.
Space steel main runners at 48 in (1200 mm) on center.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.5
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 in (400 mm) on center
and not more than 3 in (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 in per 12 ft (3 mm per 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect
securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
Provide control joints where joints occur in abutting surfaces.
Hold tees in place with concealed clips.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels with pattern running in one direction
parallel to long axis of space.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges,
install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and
panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Clean Room Installations: Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing
each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Protect products and systems from damage during installation and remainder of construction
period according to manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 5113 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Resilient flooring products and systems and supplementary items necessary for
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation
instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Shop Drawings for Special Patterns: Show layout and details of special patterns for resilient
flooring.
C.
Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of resilient flooring product and system indicated.
Include samples of accessories involving color selection.
E.
Samples for Verification Purposes: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 in by 9 in
(150 mm by 230 mm) sample of each different color and pattern of resilient flooring product
specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Label each sample
with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and in Schedules.
1.
2.
Heat-Welded Sheet Flooring: For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size samples,
but not less than 9 in (230 mm) long, of each color specified.
Seam Samples for Sheet Flooring: For each color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring
product required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 in by 9 in (150 mm by 230
mm) sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by installer for this Project.
F.
Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
G.
Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s)
are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for
applications indicated, specified, or required.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
H.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.
1.
2.
I.
1.3
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this
Section.
Maintenance Instructions: Include in operation and maintenance manual as required by Division 01
Section “Closeout Procedures”. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance of installed
work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use.
Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes
and performance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with
sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production
capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project site during
times specified Work is in progress that is experienced in installing systems similar to type
and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to
manufacturer to install products.
C.
Slip Resistance: Provide products identical to those tested for slip resistance per ASTM D 2047
with a static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for ramped surfaces.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
1.4
Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
Owner.
Architect.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 2
RESILIENT FLOORING
c.
d.
e.
2.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
1.5
Contractor, including superintendent.
Installer, including project manager and supervisor.
Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review Work requirements (Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents).
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the
manufacturer’s specifications.
Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements
reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements
exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date
for reconvening conference.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store flooring products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1.
2.
1.6
Resilient Tile Flooring: Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
Resilient Sheet Flooring: Store sheet flooring rolls upright.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in
spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at
least 48 hours after installation, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Maintain flooring products prior to installation at the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended
by manufacturer.
D.
Install flooring products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
E.
Do not install flooring over concrete substrates until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended tests. Refer to “Preparation”
Article for requirements.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 3
RESILIENT FLOORING
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Extra Materials: Furnish the following extra materials that match and are from same production runs
as products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents:
1.
Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear ft (3 linear m) in roll form and full roll
width, for each 500 linear ft (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each color, pattern, and type
of sheet flooring product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as
judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
Solid Vinyl Tile Flooring Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed
available manufacturers:
1.
2.2
Altro Group.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Congoleum Corporation.
Forbo Flooring, Inc.
Gerflor, Architectural Floor Systems, Inc.
Lonseal, Inc.
Mannington Mills, Inc.
Tarkett, Inc.
Refer to the drawings.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS
A.
Vinyl Sheet Floor Coverings: ASTM F 1303, Type I or II, Grade 1, Class A (fibrous) or B
(nonfoamed plastic) backing or ASTM F 1913 unbacked as required by product selection.
B.
Sheet Flooring Thickness: 0.125 in (3 mm).
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 4
RESILIENT FLOORING
C.
Heat-Welding Seam Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat welding
seams.
1.
D.
Integral Cove Base Accessories: Resilient accessories recommended by flooring manufacturer with
selections as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Selections: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
Cap Strip: Round vinyl cap.
Cove Strip: Flexible vinyl cove stick with nominal 1 in (25 mm) radius.
Reducer: Vinyl reducer, 1 in (25 mm) wide by 1/8 in (3 mm) high
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation
provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for products and applications indicated.
C.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer suitable for products,
applications, and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
D.
Typical Flooring: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Flooring: Not more than 60 g/L.
Concrete Moisture Barrier Floor Treatment:
1.
2.
Epoxy-Based Moisture Barrier Floor Treatment: Two-component, high-performance, nonflammable, rapid drying, water based, low odor, low VOC, two-component, penetrating epoxy;
formulated to reduce moisture vapor transmission and surface alkalinity from concrete
substrates, including aged or freshly placed ("green") concrete, prior to installation of
impervious glued-down finish flooring specified in other Division 09 sections.
Cementitious Overcoat: Fast-setting latex-fortified Portland cement skim coating intended for
interior uses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 5
RESILIENT FLOORING
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to
following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which
would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that concrete substrate finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03
Section "Concrete Finishing" for concrete substrates receiving resilient flooring.
Verify that concrete substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits.
Verify that concrete substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners,
and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Unless concrete has been watercured, then proceed with the following:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing the following tests as
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. A
pH range of 5 to 9 is required when substrate is wetted with distilled water and pHydrion
paper is applied. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform one or both of the following tests as recommended by flooring
manufacturer. Perform 3 moisture tests for first 1000 sf (92.9 sm) of concrete substrate
scheduled to receive flooring and 1 test for each additional 1000 sf (92.9 sm) or fraction
thereof. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing.
a.
b.
7.
C.
Shot-blast concrete substrate with an apparatus that abrades the surface, contains the
dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to flooring manufacturer's
written recommendations.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test in accordance with ASTM F 1869. Proceed
with installation only after concrete substrates have maximum moisture-vaporemission rate of 3 lbs of water/1000 sf (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sm) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes in accordance with ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates have a maximum 75 percent
relative humidity level measurement.
Moisture Barrier Floor Treatment: For concrete substrates not meeting moisture test
standards specified above, apply epoxy-based moisture floor treatment and cementitious
overcoat to concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 6
RESILIENT FLOORING
D.
3.4
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before flooring product installation.
After cleaning, reexamine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT FLOORING, GENERAL
A.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive.
Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
B.
Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.
C.
Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend flooring to
center of door openings.
D.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on substrate. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining
marking device.
E.
Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with
flooring manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1.
F.
3.5
Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
Hand-roll flooring in both directions from center out to embed flooring in adhesive and eliminate
trapped air according to manufacturer's written instructions. At walls, door casings, and other
locations where access by roller is impractical, press flooring firmly in place with flat-bladed
instrument.
INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
A.
Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting, if recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
B.
Lay out sheet flooring to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintain uniformity of sheet flooring direction.
Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, and not less than 6 in (150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
Match edges of sheet flooring for color shading and pattern at seams according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
Avoid cross seams.
C.
Integral Cove Base: Form integral cove base by flashing sheet flooring up vertical surfaces.
Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt flooring at top of base
against cap strip.
D.
Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections into
seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's written instructions
and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 7
RESILIENT FLOORING
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing flooring products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from exposed surfaces using cleaner
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations
and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use
protection methods recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.
1.
2.
Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until just
prior to Substantial Completion.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 6500 - 8
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and
surfaces.
1.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where indicated that the surface or material is not to be painted or
is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface
the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will
select from standard colors and finishes available.
1.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers,
exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do
not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels, unless indicated otherwise.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Prefinished wood doors.
Acoustical materials.
Prefinished Architectural woodwork and cabinets.
Elevator equipment.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Distribution cabinets.
Baked enamel coated items.
Fluorocarbon coated items.
Integral colored plaster.
Integral colored PVC.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Foundation spaces.
Furred areas.
Ceiling plenums.
Utility tunnels.
Pipe spaces.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09 9100 - 1
PAINTING
f.
g.
3.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
1.2
A.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
a.
D.
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper and copper alloys.
Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Duct shafts.
Elevator shafts.
Embossed UL labels may be used and painted where acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction
Refer to Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board
assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
MPI Gloss Levels: MPI Gloss and Sheen Standard values are measured per ASTM D523, Method
D and are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gloss Level 1:
Gloss Level 2:
Gloss Level 3:
Gloss Level 4:
Gloss Level 5:
Gloss Level 6:
Gloss Level 7:
Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees.
Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees.
35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.
70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.
More than 85 units at 60 degrees.
B.
Exterior Painting: Generally includes surfaces located in unconditioned spaces.
C.
Interior Painting: Generally includes surfaces located in conditioned spaces.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, installation instructions, and
recommendations for maintenance.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 2
PAINTING
B.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
C.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the
proposed product highlighted.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 in (200 mm) square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
D.
Field Quality Control Test Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by "Field Quality
Control" Article below.
E.
Manufacturers Project Acceptance Document: Certification that products are approved, acceptable,
suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or
required, and that warranty will be issued.
1.
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.
1.
2.
1.4
Certifications by manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
Architect may waive Submittal of Qualification Data for Available Manufacturers listed in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful
production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with
sufficient production capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production
capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times
specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type
and scope required for Project.
Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed or acceptable to
manufacturer to install products.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 3
PAINTING
C.
Manufacturers Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services
department of manufacturer with minimum of 5 years experience in providing recommendations,
observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics.
D.
MPI Standards:
1.
2.
E.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" for products and paint
systems indicated.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Install mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
a.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system.
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Apply samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent
lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required
sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
1)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq.
m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Demonstrate repair procedures for damaged surfaces.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
Clean exposed faces of mock-up.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be installed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Protect approved mock-up from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for review of
the completed Work.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor, submitted
to Architect in writing, and approved by Architect in writing.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed by Architect unless approved to become part
of the completed Work.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 4
PAINTING
1.5
A.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
1.6
A.
Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review Work requirements (drawings, specifications, and other Contract Documents).
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the
manufacturer's specifications.
Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements
reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements
exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date
for reconvening conference.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
1.7
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor, including superintendent.
Installer, including project manager and superintendent.
Manufacturer's qualified technical representative.
Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between
minimum and maximum range recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 5
PAINTING
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed,
submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section
"Substitution Procedures".
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.2
AkzoNobel Paints, dba Glidden Professional (formerly ICI Paints)
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Comex Group, including regional brands Color Wheel Paint, Frazee Paint, Kwal Paint, and
Parker Paint
Dunn-Edwards Corporation
Kelly-Moore Paints
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert Paints
Sherwin-Williams Company (The)
Color and Gloss: Refer to the drawings.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and field applied primers for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 6
PAINTING
2.3
A.
INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS
Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50; for interior concrete, plaster and gypsum board.
1.
2.
B.
Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107; for interior ferrous metal.
1.
2.
C.
A.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1); for interior surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
A.
VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR4.5.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5); for interior surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR4.5.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3); for interior surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR4.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #144 (Gloss Level 2); for interior surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR3.
LATEX PAINTS, INTERIOR
1.
2.
B.
VOC Content: E Range of E2, 101 - 150 g/l, or E3 less than 101 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR2 or EPR3.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Primer/Sealer: MPI #149; for use as a primer with interior institutional
low-odor/VOC latex intermediate and topcoats.
1.
2.
2.4
VOC Content: E Range of E1, 101 - 150 g/l, or E2, 51 - 100 g/l, or E3 less than 51 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR1 or EPR2 or EPR3.
VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR5.5.
EPOXY COATINGS, INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior (Semigloss): MPI #215 (MPI Gloss Level 5); for interior concrete,
concrete masonry units and gypsum board.
1.
VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E1, 201 - 300 g/l, or E2, 101 - 200 g/l, or E3 less than
101 g/l.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 7
PAINTING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and
associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with
Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of
surface conditions.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of
finish materials to shop applicators to ensure use of compatible primers.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform gypsum
fabrications work according to the following, unless otherwise specified in this Section:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Approved submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and specifications for cleaning
and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects or errors which would result in poor or
potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" applicable to substrates
and paint systems indicated.
C.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
2.
D.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
E.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates, unless expressly permitted by authorities having
jurisdiction for labels intended to be painted.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to
produce paint systems indicated.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 8
PAINTING
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing
by paint manufacturer.
1.
3.4
A.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as
the shop coat.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable items, equipment, and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items, equipment,
or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
Paint interior surfaces of non-ducted return air penums with a flat, nonspecular black paint
where visible through registers or grilles.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method.
If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same
material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate to achieve total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by
manufacturer.
F.
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied
spaces, exterior walls and on roofs including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Mechanical Work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets with a flat, nonspecular black paint.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 9
PAINTING
f.
g.
2.
Electrical Work:
a.
b.
c.
3.5
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
D.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
E.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces to match approved samples.
3.6
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide complete painting of piping in mechanical rooms only.
B.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/ASME A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems".
3.7
A.
FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER IDENTIFICATION
Corridor partitions, smokestop partitions, horizontal exit partitions, exit enclosures and fire walls
shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs, labels or stencils in a manner acceptable
to authority having jurisdiction.
1.
3.8
A.
Identification shall be above decorative ceiling and in concealed spaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC primer/sealer.
Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex.
Gloss and Sheen: Refer to the drawings.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 10
PAINTING
2.
Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: MPI INT 9.2F.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior.
Topcoat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior.
Gloss and Sheen: Semigloss.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based).
Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex.
Gloss and Sheen: Semigloss.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 11
PAINTING
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
09910 - 12
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM
MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION
UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL LEVEL 1
RADIOLOGY – I.R. EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT ANGIO ROOM 1064/#15
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA
SECTION 12 3661
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: The following simulated stone countertops along with supplementary items
necessary for installation:
1.
1.2
Solid surfacing countertops.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details,
installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and
field-assembled work. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures,
accessories and other items installed in countertops.
C.
Samples for Verification Purposes:
showing color and pattern selected.
D.
Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its
product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details,
and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.
E.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer/fabricator and installer.
1.
2.
F.
For simulated stone material, 6 in (150 mm) square,
For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.
Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers/fabricators
listed in this Section.
Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1.
Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating
obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 1
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturer/fabricator with not less than 5 years
experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project,
with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not
less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce
required Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work
similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and
completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production
capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during
times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar
to type and scope required for Project.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and products with specified fire-testresponse characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1.
Required Attendees:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor, including superintendent.
Installer, including project manager and supervisor.
Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and
other preparatory work performed by other trades.
Review Work requirements (Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract
Documents).
Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting
procedures.
Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the
manufacturer/fabricator’s specifications.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 2
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
3.
1.5
Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements
reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements
exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set
date for reconvening conference.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other
construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to
provide a successful installation without failure.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by
an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials
and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by
manufacture or design and installation of product. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited
to deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and
labor Defects for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers/Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers/fabricators offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed.
1.
Solid Surfacing Paneling.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Avonite Surfaces
E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company (DuPont Corian)
Formica Corporation
LG Chemical, Ltd.
Meganite Inc.
Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.
Swan Corporation (The)
Transolid, Inc.
Wilsonart International
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 3
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
B.
Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed
available manufacturers:
1.
2.2
Refer to the drawings.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer/fabricator.
Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator of primary
materials.
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A.
Solid Surface Material:
ANSI SS1.
1.
2.4
Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
Panel Thickness: Minimum 1/2 in (12 mm) or as indicated on drawings.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded and other requirements as specified in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough
Carpentry".
B.
Adhesives: Manufacturers recommended adhesive.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
Not more than 250 g/L.
C.
Backsplash: Preformed 4 in (100 mm) high coved backsplash, to match countertop.
D.
Front Edge Trim: Preformed 1-1/2 in (38 mm), to match countertops.
E.
Accessories: Provide joint seam adhesives and other items required for a complete installation
as recommended in writing by simulated stone manufacturer.
F.
Sealant: Silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.
2.5
FABRICATION OF SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Accurately cut holes and drill countertop panels to receive plumbing, fixtures, soap dispensers
and other accessories. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication and maintain minimum
clearance at walls.
B.
Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with simulated stone manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 4
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems
and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as
acceptance of surface conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Accepted submittals.
Contract Documents.
PREPARATION
A.
3.4
General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors
which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in
Work.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 in per 48 in (1.5 mm
per 1200 mm).
B.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 in per 96 in (3 mm per 2400 mm), 1/4 in (6 mm)
maximum.
C.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width.
D.
Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64 in (0.4 mm) difference between
planes of adjacent units.
E.
Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64 in (0.4 mm) difference
between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Install countertops over plywood sub-tops secured to sub-framing supports with full spread of
silicone adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Set countertops to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim
and adjust to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and
faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
C.
Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 5
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
D.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
E.
Secure backsplashes to tops and walls with adhesive.
F.
Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section “Joint
Sealants”.
G.
Prepare ends and edges of simulated stone pieces to be joined according to the
manufacturer’s/fabricator's recommendations for position and angle of butted joint. Lightly sand
and thoroughly clean to remove dirt and grease. Join pieces with adhesive clamped until fully
cured. Buff and sand to produce a smooth uniform seamless surface.
H.
Apply sealant and compress to form bond with simulated stone material and adjacent surfaces
and tool sealant surface to clean, straight lines.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Promptly clean simulated stone as work progresses to minimize final cleaning. Do not leave
adhesive or sealant to dry on simulated stone faces.
B.
Final clean and protect installed countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
HKS 16567.001
95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PIMS # P02989, WO # 1414669
2014-04-08
12 3661 - 6